Canon iR2020 Series Specifications

Reference Guide
Read this guide first.
Please read this guide before operating this equipment.
After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference.
ENG
imageRUNNER
2020/2016
Reference Guide
Manuals for the Machine
The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
The manuals supplied with optional equipment are included in the list below. Depending on the system
configuration and product purchased, some manuals may not be needed.
Guides with this symbol are printed manuals.
• Quick Reference for Basic Operations
• Basic Operations
• Troubleshooting
• Copying Instructions
• Fax Instructions
• Setting Up the Network Connection and
Installing the CD-ROM Software
• Remote User Interface Instructions
• Network Connectivity and Setup Instructions
• PCL/UFR II Printer Instructions
• UFR II Printer Instructions
• PCL Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
• UFR II Printer Driver Installation and
Instructions
• Fax Driver Installation and Instructions
CD-ROM
Guides with this symbol are PDF manuals included on the
accompanying CD-ROM. (See footnote.)
Easy Operation Guide
Reference Guide
(This Document)
Copying Guide
Facsimile Guide
Network Quick Start Guide
Remote UI Guide
CD-ROM
Network Guide
CD-ROM
PCL/UFR II Printer Guide
CD-ROM
UFR II Printer Guide
CD-ROM
PCL Driver Guide
CD-ROM
UFR II Driver Guide
CD-ROM
Fax Driver Guide
CD-ROM
• To view the manual in PDF format, Adobe Reader/Acrobat Reader/Acrobat is required. If Adobe Reader/Acrobat Reader/Acrobat is not installed on
your system, please download it from the Adobe Systems Incorporated website (http://www.adobe.com).
• The machine illustration on the cover may differ slightly from your machine.
How This Manual Is Organized
Chapter 1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Chapter 2
Basic Operations
Chapter 3
Checking and Canceling a Job
Chapter 4
Optional Equipment
Chapter 5
Customizing Settings
Chapter 6
System Manager Settings
Chapter 7
Routine Maintenance
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
Chapter 9
Appendix
Includes report samples, the specifications of the main unit and optional equipment,
and index.
Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our
products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Keys Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Illustrations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Operations and Terms Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Legal Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiv
FCC (Federal Communications Commission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Laser Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
International ENERGY STAR Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Disclaimers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvii
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images . . . . .xvii
Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Maintenance and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
Other Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
Chapter 1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Installation Location and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Select a Safe Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Provide Adequate Installation Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Moving the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Control Panel Parts and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Main Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Facsimile Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Standby Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
iv
Using the Menus and Control Panel Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Using the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
How to Turn ON the Main Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Control Panel Power Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
System Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Chapter 2
Basic Operations
What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2020/2016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Specifying Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Using the Sleep Mode to Conserve Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Restricting the Use of the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Checking, Changing, and Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Other Useful Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Entering Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Alphanumeric Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Entering the Department ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Multifunctional Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Chapter 3
Checking and Canceling a Job
Checking the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Using the Stop Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Using the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Chapter 4
Optional Equipment
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Sample System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Available Combination of Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Feeder (DADF-P1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Platen Cover Type J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
v
Finisher-U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Finishing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Card Reader-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Procedure before Using the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Procedure after Using the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Changing the Password and Page Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Checking Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Printing Counter Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Clearing Page Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Cassette Feeding Module-J1/K1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Optional Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Chapter 5
Customizing Settings
What Are Additional Functions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Opening the Additional Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Specifying Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Initial Function at Power ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Default Display after Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Tone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Setting the Toner Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Adjusting the Print Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Output Tray Designation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Changing the Language Shown on the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Displaying a Feeder Error Message Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Current Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Setting the Date Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Auto Sleep Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Auto Clear Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Daylight Saving Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
vi
Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Speed Dialing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Speed Dialing Lists (Detailed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
User’s Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Chapter 6
System Manager Settings
Specifying the System Manager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
System Manager ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
System Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
System Manager’s Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Specifying Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Erasing the Department ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Checking Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Printing Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Clearing Page Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Managing User IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Remote UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Restricting Access to Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Checking the TX/RX Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Restricting the USB Interface Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Device Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Chapter 7
Routine Maintenance
Paper Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Feeder (DADF-P1) (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Replacing the Staple Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Routine Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Platen Glass and Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Manual Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Automatic Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Transcription Roller Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Drum Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Fuser Roller Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
vii
Adjusting the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35
Print Quality and Density Improvement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35
Prevent Paper Curls or Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Prevent Paper Jams in the Two-Sided Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Using Lightweight Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
Setting the Special Bond Fixing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-39
Setting the Fixing Unit Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40
Feeder Smudge Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Displays Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Fixing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Paper Drawer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Paper Drawers 2, 3, and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Duplex Unit-A1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Feeder (DADF-P1) (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Finisher-U1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Clearing Staple Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
Finisher-U1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
List of Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Self-Diagnostic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Contacting Your Local Authorized Canon Dealer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Chapter 9
Appendix
Report Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
User’s Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Department ID List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
One-Touch Speed Dialing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
One-Touch Speed Dialing List (Detailed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Coded Speed Dialing List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Coded Speed Dialing List (Detailed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Group Dial List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
viii
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Feeder (DADF-P1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Cassette Feeding Module-J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Cassette Feeding Module-K1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Finisher-U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Duplex Unit-A1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Card Reader-E1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Relationship between Original Orientation and
Preprinted Paper Output Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
ix
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Canon imageRUNNER 2020/2016. Please read this manual
thoroughly before operating the machine to familiarize yourself with its capabilities, and to
make the most of its many functions. After reading this manual, store it in a safe place for
future reference.
How to Use This Manual
Symbols Used in This Manual
The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions,
handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.
WARNING
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or
injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely,
always pay attention to these warnings.
CAUTION
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to
persons, or damage to property if not performed correctly. To use the
machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read
these items carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid
damage to the machine.
NOTE
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional
explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly
recommended.
Keys Used in This Manual
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be
pressed are represented in this manual. The control panel keys on the machine
indicated within brackets.
Examples:
Start
Additional
Functions
x
Press [Start].
Press [Additional Functions].
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Illustrations used in this manual are those displayed when the imageRUNNER 2016
has the following optional equipment attached to it: the Fax Panel-A1 (with Super
G3 FAX Board), Feeder (DADF-P1), Finisher-U1, Additional Finisher Tray-C1, and
Cassette Feeding Module-J1.
xi
Operations and Terms Used in This Manual
This machine makes effective use of memory to perform print operations efficiently.
For example, as soon as the machine has scanned the original that you want to
copy, it can immediately scan the next person’s original. You can also print from this
machine, using a function other than the Copy function. In this machine, these
operations take place in a complex way, so that not only copies, but also various
kinds of prints may sometimes have to wait their turn before they can be printed.
To avoid confusion when reading this manual, the terms “scanning,” “printing,” and
“copying,” used throughout this manual are defined below. When making a copy, the
process of scanning originals and printing copies may be described as separate
functions.
Scanning
Scanning an original for
copying or faxing.
xii
Printing
Outputting a copy, fax, or data sent
from a personal computer to the machine.
Copying
Printing data scanned from
an original, followed by
finishing options, such as
stapling.
xiii
Legal Notices
FCC (Federal Communications Commission)
imageRUNNER 2020/2016: Model F188900
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate, radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Use of shielded cables are required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of
Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise
specified in this manual. If you make such changes or modifications, you could be
required to stop operation of the equipment.
xiv
If your equipment malfunctions, please contact your local authorized Canon dealer
from whom you purchased the equipment (if under warranty), or with whom you
have a servicing contact. If you are not sure who to contact, and have both
purchased and are using the equipment in the U.S.A., please refer to the
“SUPPORT” page on Canon USA’s Web site (http://www.usa.canon.com).
Canon U.S.A. Inc.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
TEL No. (516) 328-5600
Laser Safety
This product complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class I laser
product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS)
Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and
Safety Act of 1968. Also, this product is certified as a Class I laser product under
IEC60825-1:1993 and EN60825-1:1994. This means that the product does not
produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the product is completely confined within protective
housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine
during any phase of user operation. Do not remove protective housings or external
covers, except as directed by the equipment’s Reference Guide.
The labels shown below are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine
and next to the toner cartridge, behind the front cover.
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
xv
International ENERGY STAR Program
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon USA, Inc. has determined
that this machine meets the ENERGY STAR® Program for energy
efficiency.
The International ENERGY STAR® Office Equipment Program is
an international program that promotes energy saving through the
use of computers and other office equipment. The program backs
the development and dissemination of products with functions that
effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in
which business proprietors can participate voluntarily. The
targeted products are office equipment, such as computers,
displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and
logos are uniform among participating nations.
Trademarks
Canon, the Canon logo, imageRUNNER, and NetSpot are registered trademarks,
and NetSpot Accountant is a trademark of Canon Inc. in the United States and may
also be trademarks or registered trademarks in other countries.
Adobe and Adobe Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their
respective owners.
Copyright
Copyright 2005 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any
information storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of
Canon Inc.
xvi
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS
MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF
ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF
THIS MATERIAL.
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and
the Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and
the use of such images as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your
product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability.
A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to
be a guide only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan,
print or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the
images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult, in advance,
with your legal advisor for guidance.
•
Paper Money
•
Travelers Checks
•
Money Orders
•
Food Stamps
•
Certificates of Deposit
•
Passports
•
Postage Stamps (canceled or
uncanceled)
•
Immigration Papers
•
Identifying Badges or Insignias
•
Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled
or uncanceled)
•
Selective Service or Draft Papers
•
Bonds or Other Certificates of
Indebtedness
•
Checks or Drafts Issued by
Governmental Agencies
•
Stock Certificates
•
Motor Vehicle Licenses and
Certificates of Title
•
Copyrighted Works/Works of Art
without Permission of Copyright
Owner
xvii
Important Safety Instructions
Please read these “Important Safety Instructions” thoroughly before operating the
machine. As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user or other
persons or destruction of property, always pay attention to these instructions. Also,
since it may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation
unless otherwise specified in the manual. Improper operation or use of this
machine could result in personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair
that may not be covered under your Limited Warranty.
Installation
WARNING
• Do not install the machine near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable
substances. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside
the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not place the following items on the machine. If these items come into contact
with a high-voltage area inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn OFF the
main power switch, and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Then,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
- Necklaces and other metal objects
- Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with water or liquids
xviii
CAUTION
• Do not install the machine in unstable locations, such as unsteady platforms or
inclined floors, or in locations subject to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the
machine to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
• Never block the ventilation slots and louvers on the machine. These openings are
provided for proper ventilation of working parts inside the machine. Blocking these
openings can cause the machine to overheat. Never place the machine on a soft
surface, such as a sofa or rug.
• Do not install the machine in the following locations:
- A damp or dusty location
- A location near water faucets or water
- A location exposed to direct sunlight
- A location subject to high temperatures
- A location near open flames
xix
Power Supply
WARNING
• Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the
power cord, or pull on or excessively bend it, as this could cause electrical damage
and result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Keep the power cord away from a heat source; failure to do this may cause the power
cord coating to melt, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in
electrical shock.
• Do not connect the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may cause a fire or
electrical shock.
• Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot, as this may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Insert the power plug completely into the power outlet, as failure to do so may result
in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use power cords other than the power cord provided, as this may result in a
fire or electrical shock.
• As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in
a fire or electrical shock. If an extension cord must be used, however, use one rated
for voltages of 120 V AC and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug
completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the
power cord and the extension cord.
CAUTION
• Do not use power supplies with voltages other than those specified herein, as this
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Always grasp the power plug when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on the
power cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If
the power cord is damaged, this could cause current to leak, resulting in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If
objects are placed around the power plug, you will be unable to unplug it in an
emergency.
xx
Handling
WARNING
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine. There are high-temperature
and high-voltage components inside the machine which may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• If the machine makes strange noises, or gives off smoke, heat, or strange smells,
immediately turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord from
the power outlet. Then, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Continued use of
the machine in this condition may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use highly flammable sprays near the machine. If gas from these sprays
comes into contact with the electrical components inside the machine, it may result
in a fire or electrical shock.
• To avoid damage to the power cord and creating a fire hazard, always turn OFF the
main power switch, and unplug the interface cable when moving the machine.
Otherwise, the power cord or interface cable may be damaged, resulting in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the machine. Also, do
not spill water, liquids, or flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner,
etc.) inside the machine. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area
inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are
dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn OFF the main power switch,
and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Then, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
xxi
CAUTION
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine, as they may tip over or fall resulting in
personal injury.
• Close the feeder/platen cover gently to avoid catching your hands, as this may result
in personal injury.
• Do not press down hard on the feeder/platen cover when using the platen glass to
make copies of thick books. Doing so may damage the platen glass and result in
personal injury.
• Do not touch the finisher while the machine is printing, as this may result in personal
injury.
• Do not place your hand in the part of the tray where stapling is performed when a
finisher is attached, as this may result in personal injury.
Finisher-U1
xxii
• Turn OFF the control panel power switch for safety when the machine will not be used
for a long period of time, such as overnight. Also, turn OFF the main power switch,
and disconnect the power cord for safety when the machine will not be used for an
extended period of time, such as during consecutive holidays.
• The laser beam can be harmful to human bodies. Since radiation emitted inside the
product is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the
laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
Read the following remarks and instructions for safety.
• If the laser beam escapes from the machine, exposure may cause serious damage to
your eyes.
• Never open covers other than those instructed in this manual.
• Do not remove the caution labels attached to the laser scanner unit inside the
machine and next to the toner cartridge, behind the front cover.
xxiii
Maintenance and Inspections
WARNING
• When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, and then
disconnect the power cord. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around
the base of the power plug’s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to
ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is connected for a long
period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the
power plug and become damp. This may cause a short circuit and result in a fire.
• Clean the machine using a slightly dampened cloth with a mild detergent mixed with
water. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances.
Check detergent for flammability prior to use. If flammable substances come into
contact with a high-voltage area inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
• There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When
removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine, do not allow
necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside the machine, as this
may result in burns or electrical shock.
• Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the
toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
xxiv
CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine, do not
touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may result in burns or
electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing the toner cartridge, take care not to allow
the toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your
hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water.
Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove
the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the
jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting
into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
• When loading paper or removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your
hands on the edges of the originals or paper.
• When removing a used toner cartridge, remove the cartridge carefully to prevent the
toner from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your
eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a
physician.
xxv
Consumables
WARNING
• Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the
toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
• Do not store toner cartridges or paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may
cause the toner or paper to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
• When discarding used toner cartridges, put the cartridges into a bag to prevent the
toner remaining inside the cartridges from scattering, and then dispose of them in a
location away from open flames.
CAUTION
Keep toner and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these items
are ingested, consult a physician immediately.
Other Warnings
WARNING
For cardiac pacemaker users:
This product generates a low-level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and
feel abnormalities, please move away from the product and consult your doctor.
xxvi
Before You Start Using This
Machine
1
CHAPTER
This chapter describes what you should know before using this machine, such as parts and
their functions, and how to turn ON the main power.
Installation Location and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Standby Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Using the Menus and Control Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Using the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
How to Turn ON the Main Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Control Panel Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1-1
Installation Location and Handling
This section describes precautions for installation location and handling. We
recommend that you read this section prior to using this machine.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Installation Precautions
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations
■ Avoid locations subject to temperature and humidity extremes, whether
low or high.
For example, avoid installing the machine near water faucets, hot water heaters,
humidifiers, air conditioners, heaters or stoves.
■ Avoid installing the machine in direct sunlight.
If this is unavoidable, use curtains to shade the machine. Be sure that curtains do not
block the machine’s ventilation slots or louvers, or interfere with the electrical cord or
power supply.
1-2
Installation Location and Handling
■ Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
This machine generates a slight amount of ozone during normal use. Although sensitivity
to ozone may vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone may be more noticeable during
extended use or long production runs, especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is
recommended that the room be appropriately ventilated, sufficient to maintain a
comfortable working environment, in areas of machine operation.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Avoid locations where a considerable amount of dust accumulates.
■ Avoid locations where ammonia gas is emitted.
■ Avoid locations near volatile or flammable materials, such as alcohol or
paint thinner.
Installation Location and Handling
1-3
■ Avoid locations that are subject to vibration.
For example, avoid installing the machine on unstable floors or stands.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Avoid exposing the machine to rapid changes in temperature.
If the room in which the machine is installed is cold but rapidly heated, water droplets
(condensation) may form inside the machine. This may result in a noticeable degradation
in the quality of the copied image, the inability to properly scan an original, or the copies
having no printed image at all.
■ Avoid installing the machine near computers or other precision electronic
equipment.
Electrical interference and vibrations generated by the machine during printing can
adversely affect the operation of such equipment.
■ Avoid installing the machine near televisions, radios, or similar electronic
equipment.
The machine might interfere with sound and picture signal reception. Insert the power
plug into a dedicated power outlet, and maintain as much space as possible between the
machine and other electronic equipment.
1-4
Installation Location and Handling
Select a Safe Power Supply
■ Plug the machine into a standard 120 V AC, three-wire grounded outlet.
■ Make sure that the power supply for the machine is safe, and has a steady
voltage.
■ Do not connect the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may
cause a fire or electrical shock.
■ The power cord may become damaged if it is often stepped on or if heavy
objects are placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead
to an accident, such as a fire or electrical shock.
Installation Location and Handling
1-5
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Do not connect other electrical equipment to the same power outlet to
which the machine is connected.
Provide Adequate Installation Space
■ Provide enough space on each side of the machine for unrestricted
operation.
The optional Finisher-U1 is attached.
4" (100 mm) or more
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
49 1/4" (1,249 mm)
47 1/8" (1,198 mm) *
* The width is 40 1/8" (1,018 mm) when no options are attached,
or 49 1/8" (1,247 mm) when the optional Document Tray-J1 is
attached.
1-6
Installation Location and Handling
Moving the Machine
■ If you intend to move the machine, even to a location on the same floor of
your building, contact your local authorized Canon dealer beforehand.
■ When carrying the machine, be sure to hold the handles, as indicated
below. Failure to do so, may cause the machine to be dropped, and result
in personal injury.
Grasp these handles.
Grasp these
handles.
Installation Location and Handling
1-7
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
■ The machine is heavy, and requires two or more people to lift it. Therefore,
do not attempt to move it by yourself. Doing so may result in personal
injury.
Handling Precautions
■ Some parts inside the machine are subject to high-voltages and
temperatures. Take adequate precautions when inspecting the inside of
the machine. Do not carry out any inspections not described in this
manual.
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
■ Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine.
■ Be careful not to spill liquids or drop any foreign objects, such as paper
clips or staples inside the machine. If a foreign object comes into contact
with electrical parts inside the machine, it may cause a short circuit and
result in a fire or electrical shock.
1-8
Installation Location and Handling
■ If there is smoke or unusual noise, immediately turn the main power switch
OFF, disconnect the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your
local authorized Canon dealer. Using the machine in this state may cause a
fire or electrical shock. Also, avoid placing objects around the power plug
so that the machine can be disconnected whenever necessary.
■ Do not turn the main power switch OFF or open the front covers while the
machine is in operation. This may result in paper jams.
■ Do not use flammable sprays, such as spray glue near the machine. There
is danger of ignition.
■ This machine generates a slight amount of ozone during normal use.
Although sensitivity to ozone may vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone
may be more noticeable during extended use or long production runs,
especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is recommended that the room be
appropriately ventilated, sufficient to maintain a comfortable working
environment, in areas of machine operation.
Installation Location and Handling
1-9
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ For safety reasons, turn OFF the control panel power switch of the
machine when it will not be used for a long period of time, such as
overnight. As an added safety measure, turn OFF the main power switch,
and disconnect the power cord when the machine will not be used for an
extended period of time, such as during consecutive holidays.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
1-10
Installation Location and Handling
Parts and Their Functions
External View
The optional Platen Cover Type J is
attached to the imageRUNNER 2016.
The optional Feeder (DADF-P1) is
attached to the imageRUNNER 2020.
Parts and Their Functions
1-11
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
This section provides you with the names and functions of all parts on the outside
and inside the main unit, main control panel, and the optional facsimile control
panel. An illustration of the machine with some optional equipment attached to it is
also provided. For more information on the optional equipment, parts and their
functions, see Chapter 4, "Optional Equipment."
a Main Control Panel
Includes the keys, LCD display, and indicators
required for operating the machine. (See "Main
Control Panel," on p. 1-14.)
b Platen Cover Type J (Optional)
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
The Platen Cover Type J secures the originals
placed on the platen glass.
c Paper Drawer 1
Standard equipment for the imageRUNNER
2016. Holds up to 250 sheets of paper (20 lb
bond (80 g/m2)).
d Stack Bypass
Use the stack bypass to feed paper manually,
and for loading nonstandard paper stock, such as
envelopes. (See "Making Prints Using the Stack
Bypass," on p. 2-13.)
e Feeder (DADF-P1) (Optional)
Originals placed in the feeder are automatically
fed sheet by sheet to the scanning area. The
feeder also automatically turns over two-sided
originals to make one- or two-sided copies.
f Main Power Switch
Press to the "I" side to turn ON the machine.
(See "Main Power and Control Panel Power," on
p. 1-20.)
g Paper Drawer 2
Standard equipment for the imageRUNNER
2020. Holds up to 250 sheets of paper (20 lb
bond (80 g/m2)).
NOTE
For more information on the optional equipment that can be attached to the machine, see
Chapter 4, "Optional Equipment."
1-12
Parts and Their Functions
Internal View
The optional Fax Panel-A1 (with Super G3 FAX Board), Feeder
(DADF-P1), Finisher-U1, Additional Finisher Tray-C1, and Cassette
Feeding Module-J1 are attached.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
a Platen Glass
Place originals here when scanning books,
heavyweight originals, thin originals,
transparencies, etc.
b Toner Cartridge
When toner runs out, pull out the toner cartridge,
and replace it with a new one. Toner cartridges
are sold separately (not standard equipment).
(See "Consumables," on p. 7-42.)
c Front Cover
d Paper Drawer’s Left Cover
Open this cover to clear a paper jam in the paper
drawers.
e Left Cover
Open this cover to clear a paper jam inside the
main unit.
f Fixing Unit
If a paper jam occurs in the fixing unit, remove
jammed paper carefully. (See "Fixing Unit," on p.
8-6.)
Open this cover to replace the toner cartridge.
Parts and Their Functions
1-13
Control Panel Parts and Functions
Main Control Panel
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
a Paper Select key
Press to select the desired paper source.
b Paper Select Indicator
Lights green to indicate the selected paper
source.
c Jam Location Indicator
Lights red to indicate the location of a paper jam.
d Density key
Press to darken or lighten the documents you
want to copy or send or receive via fax.
e Collate/Staple key
Press to switch between the Collate and Staple
modes.
f LCD Display
Displays messages, prompts, text, settings, and
numbers when operating the machine.
g Image Quality key
Press to select the image quality best suited to
the quality of your originals.
1-14
Parts and Their Functions
h Reset key
Press to cancel all settings and return to the
Standby display.
i System Monitor key
Press to check the status of the machine, print,
fax, or copy jobs.
j Control Panel Power Switch (Sub Power
Supply)
Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF. When
turned OFF, the machine is in the Sleep mode.
k Counter Check key
Press to display the copy and print totals on the
LCD display.
l Numeric keys
Use to enter alphanumeric characters.
m Stop key
Press to stop copying or scanning.
n Start key
Press to start an operation.
■ Main Control Panel Continued
o Clear key
w Additional Functions key
Press to clear entered values or characters.
p Main Power Indicator
Press to specify additional functions.
x 2 on 1 key
Lights when the main power is turned ON.
Press to specify the Image Combination mode.
For more information, see Chapter 2, "Special
Copying Features," in the Copying Guide.
q ID key
Press when setting or enabling Department ID
Management.
r Error Indicator
Blinks or lights red if an error occurs in the
machine.
s Tone key
Press to switch temporarily to tone dialing when
connected through a rotary pulse line. This
enables you to access information services that
only accept tone dialing. For more information,
see Chapter 3, “Sending Faxes,” in the Facsimile
Guide.
t View Settings key
Press to confirm your settings.
u Processing/Data Indicator
Flashes or blinks green when the machine is
performing operations. When the Processing/
Data indicator maintains a steady green light, fax
data is stored in memory.
v Different Size Originals key
Press to specify the Different Size Originals
mode. For more information, see Chapter 2,
"Special Copying Features," in the Copying
Guide.
y
or
keys
Press [
] to decrease values or go back to
the previous items in the menu. Press [
] to
increase values or proceed to the next items in
the menu.
z Frame Erase key
Press to specify the Frame Erase mode. For more
information, see Chapter 2, "Special Copying
Features," in the Copying Guide.
A Two-Page Separation key
Press to specify the Two-Page Separation mode.
For more information, see Chapter 2, "Special
Copying Features," in the Copying Guide.
B Two-Sided key
Press to specify the Two-Sided mode. For more
information, see Chapter 2, "Special Copying
Features," in the Copying Guide, and Chapter 3,
"Sending Faxes," in the Facsimile Guide.
C Copy Ratio key
Press to enlarge or reduce copies. For more
information, see Chapter 1, "Basic Copying
Features," in the Copying Guide.
D OK key
Press to confirm and accept your settings.
Parts and Their Functions
1-15
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Facsimile Control Panel
The Facsimile Control Panel is attached only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board
and Fax Panel-A1 are installed. For more information on using the Fax function, see
the Facsimile Guide.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
a One-Touch Speed Dialing Panels
Open the first panel to display one-touch speed
dialing keys 21-40. Open the second panel to
display keys 41-60.
b One-Touch Speed Dialing keys
Dial numbers registered under one-touch speed
dialing keys.
c Direct TX key
Sets the machine to the Direct Sending mode so
you can send a document immediately ahead of
other documents stored in memory.
d Delayed TX key
Press to specify a time for the machine to
automatically send your documents.
e Pause key
Inserts a pause between digits or after the entire
telephone number when dialing or registering
facsimile numbers.
f Redial key
Redials the previous number that was dialed
manually by using the numeric keys.
1-16
Parts and Their Functions
g Coded Dial key
Press [Coded Dial], followed by a three digit code
to dial the telephone number registered for coded
speed dialing.
h Address Book key
Press to search for names or fax numbers that
have been registered for speed dialing, and then
use the number for dialing.
i FAX key
Press to switch the machine to the Fax mode.
j COPY key
Press to switch the machine to the Copy mode.
k Hook key
Press to activate or deactivate the telephone line.
This is necessary for dialing a fax information
service. For more information, see Chapter 3,
“Sending Faxes,” in the Facsimile Guide.
l Stamp key
Press [Stamp] to apply a stamp on the front side
of originals after they have been scanned, so that
you can determine whether a document was
scanned and sent.
Standby Display
The Standby display differs depending on which mode is selected.
1
Copy Ratio
Before You Start Using This Machine
■ Copy Mode
Paper Selection
100% AUTO
A TEXT
O1
Copy Quantity
Image Quality
Copy Density
NOTE
For more information on specifying Copy modes, see the Copying Guide.
■ Fax Mode
08/03/2005 WED 10:50
FaxOnly
STANDARD
Receive Mode
Date & Time
Image Quality
NOTE
For more information on specifying Fax modes, see the Facsimile Guide.
Standby Display
1-17
Using the Menus and Control Panel Keys
This section provides a brief overview on how to use the control panel keys to open
menus and make selections.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Using the Menus
The machine employs a menu system that you can use to register important
information or set up important features. Follow the procedure below to display and
operate these menus.
IMPORTANT
If the Auto Clear mode is set and you do not press a key or operate the machine for a
specified period of time, the machine will return to the Standby display automatically. You
will have to start the procedure from the beginning.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
The Additional Functions menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] to display the desired menu item ➞
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
COMMON SETTINGS
1.DEFAULT SETTINGS
There are nine Additional Functions menu items.
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
ADD. FUNCTIONS
9.SYSTEM SETTINGS
NOTE
Displaying menu items by pressing [
] or [
] is rotational. For example, if
you press [
] when the first menu item is displayed, the menu rotates to the
last menu item. Also, if you press [
] when the last menu item is displayed, the
menu rotates to the first menu item.
1-18
Using the Menus and Control Panel Keys
3
Press [
] or [
] to browse through the menu items ➞
press [OK] to go to the next menu level.
OK
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
NOTE
If you do not press a key for two minutes, the machine automatically returns to the
Standby display. For more information on the Auto Clear Time mode, see "Auto
Clear Time," on p. 5-42.
Using the Menus and Control Panel Keys
1-19
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Stop
Main Power and Control Panel Power
The machine is provided with two power switches, a main power switch and a
control panel power switch.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
How to Turn ON the Main Power
This section explains how to turn ON the main power.
1
Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted into the
power outlet.
WARNING
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may
result in electrical shock.
2
Press the main power switch to ON ("I" side). The main power
switch is located on the right side of the machine.
If you want to turn the main power OFF, first turn the control panel power switch
OFF, and then press the main power switch to the " " side.
The main power indicator on the control panel lights when the main power is
turned ON.
IMPORTANT
If the main power indicator does not light, make sure that the power plug is firmly
inserted into the power outlet.
1-20
Main Power and Control Panel Power
The screen shown below is displayed until the machine is
ready to scan.
INITIALIZING...
If a message is displayed on the LCD display, proceed to step 4.
The machine is ready to scan in approximately 8 seconds (at a room temperature
of 68°F) after the screen above appears.
The screen below is displayed when the machine is ready to scan.
100% AUTO
A TEXT
O1
IMPORTANT
• If you turn OFF the main power, wait at least 10 seconds before turning the main
power back ON.
• Do not turn the main power OFF if the optional Super G3 Fax Board is installed,
and you want to be able to send or receive fax documents. Sending or receiving fax
documents cannot be done when the main power is turned OFF.
NOTE
• The default copy settings are:
- Copy Ratio:
Direct (100 %)
- Paper Selection: Auto Paper Selection
- Copy Density: Auto Density Control
- Copy Quantity: 1
- Image Quality: TEXT
- Copy Function: 1 to 1-sided copy
• You can change the default copy settings to suit your needs. (See Chapter 3,
"Customizing Settings," in the Copying Guide.)
Main Power and Control Panel Power
1-21
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
3
4
Press the appropriate keys in accordance with the messages
displayed on the LCD display.
If there are no messages displayed, this step is unnecessary.
● If the message <INSERT CONTROL CARD> appears:
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
INSERT CONTROL CARD
❑ Insert a control card into the optional Card Reader-E1.
The Standby display is displayed.
NOTE
• If the optional Card Reader-E1 is not attached, this message will not appear.
• For instructions on using the optional Card Reader-E1, see "Card Reader-E1," on
p. 4-16.
● If the message <ENTER DEPT. ID> appears:
ENTER DEPT.ID
ABC
DEF
2
1
GHI
JKL
4
PQRS
3
6
5
TUV
7
Tone
❑ Enter the Department ID using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
MNO
WXYZ
8
9
SYMBOLS
0
#
ENTER DEPT.ID
1234567
OK
1-22
Main Power and Control Panel Power
DEPT.ID PASSWORD
ABC
JKL
4
❑ Enter the password using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK] or [ID].
6
5
TUV
7
3
MNO
DEPT.ID PASSWORD
*******
WXYZ
8
9
SYMBOLS
0
#
OK
100% AUTO
A TEXT
O1
The Standby display appears.
Log In/Out
ID
NOTE
• If Department ID Management has not been enabled, this message will not
appear.
• <DEPT. ID PASSWORD> is displayed even if a password has not been set. In this
case, press [OK] to return to the Standby display.
• For instructions on entering the Department ID and password, see "Entering the
Department ID and Password," on p. 2-11.
\
Main Power and Control Panel Power
1-23
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
PQRS
Tone
DEF
2
1
GHI
Control Panel Power Switch
If the machine remains idle for a specified period of time, or if the control panel
power switch is pressed, the machine enters the Sleep mode.
Press the control panel power switch to cancel the Sleep mode and resume normal
machine operations.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
ON/OFF
System Monitor
Reset
View Settings
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
Tone
Counter
Check
SYMBOLS
Additional
Functions
Stop
Log In/Out
Clear
Start
NOTE
• The power consumption while the machine is in the Sleep mode can be set from the
Additional Functions menu. (See "Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode," on p. 5-26.)
• The machine will not enter the Sleep mode if it is scanning or printing. (See "Auto Sleep
Time," on p. 5-41.)
• The machine can receive and print documents from a personal computer when it is in the
Sleep mode. Fax documents can also be received while the machine is in the Sleep
mode.
1-24
Main Power and Control Panel Power
System Settings
To set up the machine, refer to the following guides or sections for instructions:
■ Connecting the Machine to the Network
See the Network Quick Start Guide.
■ Setting up the Network
See the Network Guide.
■ Installing the Printer Driver
See the PCL Driver Guide or UFR II Driver Guide.
■ Using the Fax Function
See the Facsimile Guide.
■ Date and Time Settings
See "Current Date and Time," on p. 5-38.
■ System Manager Settings
See "Specifying the System Manager Settings," on p. 6-2.
System Settings
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
It is necessary to set up the machine before using it on a network, as a printer, or
with the Fax function.
1-25
Basic Operations
2
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the main features and basic operations of the machine.
What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2020/2016. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Specifying Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Using the Sleep Mode to Conserve Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Restricting the Use of the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Checking, Changing, and Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Other Useful Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Entering Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Alphanumeric Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Entering the Department ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Multifunctional Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2-1
What This Machine Can Do
All the elements you will ever need in a digital
multitasking machine.
2
The imageRUNNER 2020/2016
incorporates a rich array of input and
output features that can greatly enhance
your efficiency.
Basic Operations
Copy
Fax
Print
Equipped with features that meet the
needs of document work in a digitized
office, the imageRUNNER 2020/2016
represents the ultimate in digital
multitasking machines.
Remote UI
Copying
In addition to normal copying functions,
convenient new functions, such as 2 on 1
Combination, which enables you to
automatically reduce two LTR originals to fit on
11" × 17" paper, and Different Size Originals for
copying originals of different sizes together in
one copy operation, are provided to increase
your productivity.
See the Copying Guide
1
1
2
2
2 on 1 Combination
Faxing (optional)*
In addition to normal facsimile functions, the
machine offers you Super G3 compatibility,
which enables you to transmit documents at
high speeds, greatly reducing transmission
costs as compared to conventional facsimile
machines.
If the optional Super G3 FAX Board and Fax
Driver are installed, you can send facsimiles
from your computer.
*The optional Super G3 FAX Board and Fax Panel-A1
are required.
2-2
What This Machine Can Do
See the Facsimile Guide
Original
Fax
See the PCL/UFR II Printer Guide
This machine uses UFR II (Ultra Fast Rendering
II) Technology, which utilizes a newly invented
printing algorithm to minimize file processing
and achieve maximum performance. Also, if
you install the optional PCL Printer Kit-J1, you
can use the machine as an emulation printer of
PCL5e and PCL6.
1
Sending data
from computers
Using the Remote User Interface
You can control functions, such as confirming
the status of the machine and job operations, all
from your computer’s Web browser.
The imageRUNNER 2020/2016 comes standard
equipped with a direct Ethernet connection
interface. Once the Ethernet interface port is
configured properly, the imageRUNNER
2020/2016 can be controlled and set up
through the Remote UI and network. Also, you
can use the Remote UI to fax from your
computer using the Ethernet connection. (If the
optional Super G3 FAX Board and Fax Driver
are installed.) For instructions on configuring
the Ethernet port, see the Network Guide.
Network Interface
This machine can be connected to a network
using Ethernet (standard equipment).
Connecting to a network enables you to use
utility software, including the Remote UI,
NetSpot*, NetSpot Console, etc.
Printing
2
See the Remote UI Guide
Web
Browser
See the Network Guide
Device Information
NetSpot enables you to manage and make
various settings for the printers and copiers
connected to a network from a PC. NetSpot
Console enables you to perform the same
operations as NetSpot, but from a Web browser.
*NetSpot and NetSpot Console can be downloaded
from Canon’s Web site (http://www.usa.canon.com),
and they are supplied with the optional PCL Printer
Kit-J1.
Manage
What This Machine Can Do
2-3
Basic Operations
Printing
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2020/2016
Specifying Settings
The Additional Functions menu appears when you press
Functions).
Basic Operations
2
(Additional
The Additional Functions menu enables you to make common settings related to
many functions of the machine, as well as customize specific functions to suit your
needs.
For more information on the settings not explained in this manual, see the following
manuals:
• Copy
• Fax
Settings:
Settings:
• Printer
The Copying Guide
The Facsimile Guide
Settings: The PCL/UFR II Printer Guide or UFR II Printer Guide
• Network
Settings: The Network Guide
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
The Additional Functions Menu
NOTE
• Settings made from the Additional Functions menu are not changed even if you press
(Reset).
• For instructions on customizing settings, see Chapter 5, "Customizing Settings."
• For instructions on specifying System Settings, see Chapter 6, "System Manager
Settings."
2-4
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2020/2016
Using the Sleep Mode to Conserve Power
You can conserve power efficiently by setting the Sleep mode.
You can set the machine to enter the Sleep mode manually, by pressing the control
panel power switch, or specify to have the machine enter the Sleep mode at a
preset time. To reactivate the machine, press the control panel power switch again.
Restricting the Use of the Machine
You can protect the machine from unauthorized access by setting Department IDs
and passwords. These Department IDs and passwords restrict sending and
copying operations from the machine.
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2020/2016
2-5
2
Basic Operations
NOTE
• The LCD display turns OFF when the machine enters the Sleep mode.
• The machine can continue to receive fax documents, and process or print data sent from
computers even when the machine is in the Sleep mode.
• The Auto Sleep mode can be set from 3 to 30 minutes. The default setting is '5 MIN.'
(See "Auto Sleep Time," on p. 5-41.)
Checking, Changing, and Canceling Jobs
The System Monitor menu enables you to check the status of the machine, and
cancel print, copy, and fax jobs.
0100 17:00 PRINTING
1 X 1 / 34
Copy Status
2
Basic Operations
0100 17:00 TX STNDBY
Fax Status
5004 10:30 RX OK
1234567890
Fax Log
0004
*
Document - Notepad
Print Status
0001 17:00
*
USER DATA LIST
Report Status
NOTE
• For instructions on checking the status of copy, fax, print, and report jobs, see "Checking
Job Status," on p. 3-3.
• For instructions on canceling a job, see "Canceling a Job," on p. 3-5.
2-6
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2020/2016
Other Useful Functions
Other useful functions are:
■ Auto Drawer Switching
If a paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the machine automatically locates
another paper drawer loaded with the same size paper, and begins feeding paper from
that paper drawer.
■ Auto Clear
If the machine is not used for a period of approximately two minutes after the last print job
or a key operation is performed, the machine automatically restores the default settings.
NOTE
You can set the Auto Clear Time from 1 to 9 minutes in one minute increments. The
default setting is '2 MIN.' (See "Auto Clear Time," on p. 5-42.)
Overview of the imageRUNNER 2020/2016
2-7
2
Basic Operations
NOTE
• This function can be used when the machine has two or more paper drawers.
(imageRUNNER 2020 or imageRUNNER 2016 with the optional paper drawer.)
• You can set whether a paper drawer is subject to automatic paper drawer switching for
each function. The default setting is 'OFF' for the stack bypass, and 'ON' for the other
paper drawers. (See "Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching," on p. 5-23.)
Entering Characters
For screens that require alphanumeric entries, enter characters using the numeric
keys on the control panel, as shown below.
When you come to a step that requires entering a name for data registration, the
letter or number in the upper right corner of the LCD display tells you the entry
mode.
Basic Operations
2
:A
Display
:A or :a
:1
Entry Mode
What It Does
Text
Enables you to enter upper and lower case letters. You
can also press 1 or
# to enter symbols.
Number
Enables you to enter numbers.
SYMBOLS
Alphanumeric Characters
Example: Enter <Canon>.
Tone
1
Press [Tone] to change the entry mode to <:A>.
Tone
The entry mode changes every time you press
(Tone), as follows:
<:A> (upper case characters), <:a> (lowercase characters), and <:1> (numeric
characters).
NAME
:A
NOTE
The numeric keys are clearly labeled with one number and some letters.
2-8
Entering Characters
GHI
DEF
2
JKL
4
PQRS
3
MNO
6
5
TUV
WXYZ
8
7
2
Each key contains the upper and lower case letters for its group of letters. For
example, 2 contains the letters <ABCabc>. To enter a symbol, press
1 or
# .
9
ABC
SYMBOLS
Tone
#
0
Press the appropriate numeric keys containing the characters
that you want to enter.
SYMBOLS
Key
Characters
1
@.-_/
ABC
2
ABCabc
3
DEFdef
4
GHIghi
5
JKLjkl
6
MNOmno
7
PQRSpqrs
8
TUVtuv
9
WXYZwxyz
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
2
Basic Operations
ABC
1
SYMBOLS
-. #!”,;:^ _=/l’?$@%&+\˜()[ ]{ }< >
#
ABC
JKL
4
PQRS
3
MNO
6
5
TUV
7
Tone
DEF
2
1
GHI
WXYZ
8
9
SYMBOLS
0
#
3
Enter <Canon>.
❑ Press
ABC
❑ Press
Tone
❑ Press
ABC
❑ Press
MNO
2
repeatedly until an upper case <C> appears.
until <:a> appears.
❑ Press [
❑ Press [
2
until you see a lower case <a>.
6
until a lower case <n> appears.
] to move the cursor to the right ➞ press
MNO
] to move the cursor to the right ➞ press
MNO
6
until an <o> appears.
6
until an <n> appears.
<Canon> is displayed.
NAME
Canon
:a
Entering Characters
2-9
NOTE
• To enter a space, press [
].
• To move the cursor, press [
] or [
].
• If you make a mistake when entering characters, press [
] or [
] to
position the cursor under the incorrect character ➞ press C (Clear) to delete the
incorrect character ➞ enter the correct character.
• To delete all of the entered characters, press and hold C (Clear).
• The available entry modes, and the maximum number of characters that you can
enter vary, depending on the types of entries you are making.
2
Basic Operations
OK
2-10
4
When you have entered all characters, press [OK].
Entering Characters
Entering the Department ID and Password
If Department ID Management has been set, the Department ID and password
must be entered before operating this machine.
ABC
JKL
4
PQRS
3
MNO
6
5
TUV
7
Tone
DEF
2
1
GHI
1
Enter your Department ID (up to seven digits) using the
numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
WXYZ
8
9
SYMBOLS
0
OK
#
When you press [OK], <DEPT. ID PASSWORD> appears on the LCD display. If
no password has been set, proceed to step 3.
ENTER DEPT.ID
1234567
DEPT.ID PASSWORD
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the Department ID, press
the correct Department ID.
C
(Clear) ➞ enter
Entering the Department ID and Password
2-11
2
Basic Operations
NOTE
• For instructions on setting the Department ID and password, see "Department ID
Management," on p. 6-7.
• If you are using a control card for Department ID Management, the message <INSERT
CONTROL CARD> appears on the LCD display. Insert the control card into the card slot.
(See "Card Reader-E1," on p. 4-16.)
ABC
DEF
2
1
GHI
JKL
3
4
6
5
PQRS
2
MNO
TUV
Enter the password (up to seven digits) using the numeric
keys ➞ press [OK] or [ID].
WXYZ
8
7
The numbers that you enter for the password are displayed as asterisks
(*******).
9
SYMBOLS
Tone
0
#
OK
DEPT.ID PASSWORD
*******
Log In/Out
ID
100% AUTO
A TEXT
O1
The Standby display appears.
Basic Operations
2
NOTE
• If the Department ID or password that you enter is incorrect, the message <ENTER
AGAIN> will appear on the LCD display. Repeat this procedure from step 1.
• If you make a mistake when entering the password, press C (Clear) ➞ enter the
correct password.
Log In/Out
ID
3
When your operations are complete, press [ID].
If you are using a control card, remove the control card, and take it with you. (See
"Card Reader-E1," on p. 4-16.)
ENTER DEPT.ID
The display for entering the Department ID appears.
NOTE
• To perform operations again, you have to re-enter your Department ID and
password.
• If you do not press ID (ID) after you are finished operating the machine, any
subsequent copies, scans, or prints made are added to the total of the Department
ID you previously entered.
• The display for entering the Department ID and password automatically appears
after the set Auto Clear Time elapses. (See "Auto Clear Time," on p. 5-42.)
• After pressing ID (ID), all settings are canceled, and the machine returns to the
Standby display.
2-12
Entering the Department ID and Password
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
If you are making prints on transparencies, labels, nonstandard paper size stock, or
envelopes, load the paper stock into the stack bypass.
NOTE
• For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
• For more information on paper types that can be used with this machine, see "Available
Paper Stock," on p. 2-24.
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
2-13
2
Basic Operations
IMPORTANT
• Note the following points when using the stack bypass:
- Paper Quantity: one to 80 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2), stacked approximately 3/8"
(10 mm) high)
- Paper Size: 3 3/4" × 5 7/8" to 11 3/4" × 17" (95 mm × 148 mm to 297 mm × 432 mm)
- Paper Weight: 17 to 32 lb bond (64 to 128 g/m2)
- Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use, to allow
the paper to feed smoothly through the stack bypass (allowable curl amount: less than
3/8" (10 mm) for normal paper, less than 1/4" (5 mm) for heavyweight paper). There are
some types of paper stock which may meet the above specifications, but cannot be fed
into the stack bypass.
• Do not load different size/type paper at the same time.
• Feed label sheets one sheet at a time, and remove each sheet as it is delivered to the
output tray. Loading several label sheets together may cause paper jams.
• Depending on the type of heavyweight paper you want to load, if you load multiple sheets
of heavyweight paper into the stack bypass, a paper jam may occur. In this case, load
only one sheet of heavyweight paper at a time.
• When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies,
be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If
the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image.
Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper
could jam.
• If you are printing on envelopes, do not allow more than 10 envelopes to accumulate in
the output tray. Always empty the output tray once 10 envelopes have accumulated.
■ Standard Size
You can select standard inch paper, or A or B series paper.
■ Free Size
You can load nonstandard paper sizes (3 3/4" × 5 7/8" to 11 3/4" × 17" (95 mm × 148 mm
to 297 mm × 432 mm)).
■ Envelope
The following envelopes can be loaded into the stack bypass:
• COM10:
4 1/8" × 9 1/2" (104.7 mm × 241.3 mm)
• Monarch: 3 7/8" × 7 1/2" (98.4 mm × 190.5 mm)
• DL:
4 3/8" × 8 5/8" (110 mm × 220 mm)
• ISO-C5:
6 3/8" × 9" (162 mm × 229 mm)
• ISO-B5:
7" × 9 7/8" (176 mm × 250 mm)
For more information on specific envelope types, see "Available Paper Stock," on p. 2-24.
Basic Operations
2
1
Open the stack bypass.
NOTE
If the paper size you are going to load into the stack bypass is different from the
paper size stored in <BYPASS STD SET> (Stack bypass standard settings), set
<BYPASS STD SET> to 'OFF' in COMMON SETTINGS (from the Additional
Functions menu). (See "Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass," on p. 5-30.)
● If the paper you want to specify is already loaded in the stack
bypass:
Paper Select
❑ Press [Paper Select] repeatedly until the indicator for the stack bypass lights.
❑ Proceed to step 4.
2-14
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
● If the paper loaded in the stack bypass is not the paper that you
want to specify:
❑ Check to see if any job is reserved. (See "Checking Job Status," on p. 3-3.)
If there is a current or reserved job, you can reserve a change of paper for the
stack bypass. (See Chapter 1, "Basic Copying Features," in the Copying
Guide.)
If there is no reserved job, remove any paper remaining in the stack bypass ➞
continue the procedure from step 2.
2
Adjust the slide guides to match the size of the paper.
Basic Operations
2
Slide Guides
If you are feeding large size paper, pull out the auxiliary tray, and extend the tray
extension.
Auxiliary Tray
Tray Extension
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
2-15
3
Load the paper into the stack bypass.
Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit
mark ( ).
Basic Operations
2
When you use the stack bypass to make copies, straighten out curled paper
prior to use, as shown below. Curled paper may cause a paper jam.
Feeding Direction
If there is difficulty in straightening out curled paper, curl the front edges of the
paper upward, as shown below.
Feeding Direction
2-16
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
To print on the back side of preprinted paper, load the preprinted paper face up
into the stack bypass, as shown in the illustration below.
IMPORTANT
• When loading paper into the stack bypass, align the paper stack neatly between
the slide guides. If the paper is not loaded correctly, a paper jam may occur.
• If you are printing on heavyweight paper or envelopes using the stack bypass,
remove the paper or envelopes, curl their feeding edges upward approximately 1/8"
(3 mm), and then reload the paper or envelopes. Curling the feeding edges enables
the rollers to grip the paper or envelopes as they are fed into the stack bypass.
NOTE
• If there are instructions on the paper package about which side of the paper to
load, follow those instructions.
• When the paper is loaded into the stack bypass, the side facing down is the one
printed on.
• If problems, such as poor print quality or paper jams occur, try turning the paper
stack over and reload it.
● If you are loading envelopes into the stack bypass:
❑ Take five envelopes, loosen them as shown, and then stack them together.
Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes.
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
2-17
Basic Operations
2
Feeding
Direction
When copying on the back
side of a preprinted sheet.
❑ Place the envelopes on a clean, level surface, and press all the way around the
envelopes by hand, in the direction of the arrows, to remove any curls. Repeat
this step five times for each set of five envelopes.
Basic Operations
2
IMPORTANT
Take particular care to spread the envelopes out in the direction that they
will be fed.
❑ Hold down the four corners of the envelopes firmly, so that they and the sealed
or glued portion stay flat.
Flap
2-18
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
IMPORTANT
• Do not print on the back side of the envelopes (the side with the flap).
• If the envelopes become filled with air, flatten them by hand before loading
them into the stack bypass.
Basic Operations
2
Flap
❑ Load the envelopes, as shown below.
Feeding Direction
When Printing on the Front
Side of the Envelopes
IMPORTANT
• The stack bypass can hold ten envelopes at a time.
• Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
2-19
4
Select the desired paper size.
● If you want to select a standard paper size or an envelope type:
❑ Press [Paper Select] repeatedly until the stack bypass indicator lights.
Paper Select
❑ Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
2
] until the desired paper size or envelope type appears
SELECT PAPER SIZE
LTR
Basic Operations
OK
SELECT PAPER TYPE
PLAIN PAPER
NOTE
If you select COM10, MONARCH, DL, ISO-C5, or ISO-B5 for the envelope type,
<ENVELOPE> is automatically selected, and the screen for selecting the paper
type will not appear.
● If you want to select a nonstandard paper size:
❑ Press [Paper Select] repeatedly until the stack bypass indicator lights.
Paper Select
❑ Press [
ABC
JKL
4
PQRS
TUV
❑ Enter the vertical size of the paper using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
The vertical size can be set from 3 3/4" to 11 3/4" (95 mm to 297 mm).
WXYZ
8
7
3
MNO
5
9
SYMBOLS
Tone
#
0
OK
ABC
DEF
2
1
GHI
JKL
4
PQRS
3
MNO
6
5
TUV
7
Tone
VERTICAL SIZE
95 MM
HORIZONTAL SIZE
148 MM
❑ Enter the horizontal size of the paper using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
The horizontal size can be set from 5 7/8" to 17" (148 mm to 432 mm).
WXYZ
8
9
SYMBOLS
0
OK
2-20
VERTICAL SIZE
95 MM
6
DEF
2
1
] until <FREESIZE> appears ➞ press [OK].
SELECT PAPER SIZE
FREESIZE
OK
GHI
] or [
#
HORIZONTAL SIZE
148 MM
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
SELECT PAPER TYPE
PLAIN PAPER
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] to select the desired paper type ➞
SELECT PAPER TYPE
PLAIN PAPER
100%
LTR
A TEXT
O1
IMPORTANT
When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or
transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using
heavyweight paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect
the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a
service repair, or the paper could jam.
NOTE
• <TRANSPARENCY> can be selected only if <LTR> is selected as the paper size.
• If you select <TRANSPARENCY> or <LABELS>, Staple in the finisher mode is
ignored.
• For more information on paper types, see "Available Paper Stock," on p. 2-24.
6
Place your originals ➞ select the desired copy settings.
100%
LTR
A TEXT
Start
7
O1
Press [Start].
Copying starts.
NOTE
To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standby display, press
(Reset).
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass
2-21
2
Basic Operations
5
Multifunctional Operations
The imageRUNNER 2020/2016 offers the user many functions, such as printing,
scanning, and copying, which can be used together. The following table provides
you with the details of multifunctional operations.
2
Basic Operations
■ How to read the table
The table on the following page indicates the availability of the operations listed in the
horizontal rows when the operations listed in the vertical columns are already being
performed.
Examples:
• If the machine receives print data when it is already printing documents that have been
received by fax, print performance may be affected.
• You cannot scan originals for a copy job and a fax job at the same time.
■ Status Description
Receive:
• via Network: A print job is being received in memory via a network (before printing).
• via Fax: A fax job is being received in memory (before printing).
• Print Data: A print job is being received in memory via the USB port (before printing).
Send:
• via Fax: A fax job is being sent.
Print:
• Copy: A copy job is being printed.
• RX Document: A fax job is being printed.
• Print Data: A print or report job is being printed via a network or USB port.
Scan:
• Copy: A copy job is being scanned.
• via Fax: A fax job is being scanned.
2-22
Multifunctional Operations
: Available
: Unavailable
Current Jobs
Next Jobs
Receive
via
Network
via
Fax
Send
Print
Data
via
Fax
Print
RX
Print
Copy DocuData
ment
Scan
Copy
via
Fax
via
Net-work
Receive via Fax
Send
via Fax
*1
*2
Copy
Print
RX Document
Print
Data
Scan
Copy
via Fax
*1
*1
*1 You can reserve a fax job.
*2 If a fax job reserved in memory starts during Direct Sending, it will start after Direct Sending finished.
Multifunctional Operations
2-23
Basic Operations
2
Print
Data
Available Paper Stock
The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following
table. The paper type loaded in each paper drawer can be displayed if you store
that information in the machine beforehand. (See "Identifying the Type of Paper in a
Paper Source," on p. 5-25.)
2
Basic Operations
: Available
: Unavailable
Paper Source
Paper Type
Paper Drawer
(17 to 24 lb bond
(64 to 90 g/m2))
Stack Bypass
(17 to 32 lb bond
(64 to 128 g/m2))
Plain*1
Color*1
Recycled*1
Heavy 1*2
Heavy 2*3
Heavy 3*4
Bond*5
Transparency*6
Envelopes
Labels
Three Hole Punch Paper*7
*1 From 17 lb to 20 lb bond (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2).
*2 From 20 lb to 24 lb bond (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2).
*3 From 24 lb to 28 lb bond (91 g/m2 to 105 g/m2).
*4 From 28 lb to 32 lb bond (106 g/m2 to 128 g/m2).
*5 From 20 lb to 24 lb bond (75 g/m2 to 90 g/m2).
*6 Use only LTR transparencies made especially for this machine.
*7 Only LTR paper can be used.
IMPORTANT
It is recommended not to use the paper with anything printed on the back.
2-24
Available Paper Stock
: Available
: Unavailable
Paper Source
Paper Size
Paper
Drawers
2, 3, 4
Stack
Bypass
11" × 17"
LGL
8 1/2" × 14"
LTR
8 1/2" × 11"
LTRR
11" × 8 1/2"
STMT
8 1/2" × 5 1/2"
STMTR
5 1/2" × 8 1/2"
EXEC
7 1/4" × 10 1/2"
COM 10
4 1/8" × 9 1/2"
(104.7 mm × 241.3 mm)
Monarch
3 7/8" × 7 1/2"
(98.4 mm × 190.5 mm)
Envelope DL
Free Size
Paper
Drawer 1
2
Basic Operations
11" × 17"
Width x Length
4 3/8" × 8 5/8"
(110 mm × 220 mm)
ISO-B5
7" × 9 7/8"
(176 mm × 250 mm)
ISO-C5
6 3/8" × 9"
(162 mm × 229 mm)
3 3/4" × 5 7/8" to
11 3/4" × 17"
(95 mm × 148 mm to
297 mm × 432 mm)
NOTE
• For instructions on loading paper, see the following sections:
- Paper Drawers: "Loading Paper," on p. 7-2
- Stack Bypass: "Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass," on p. 2-13
• Paper drawers 2, 3, and 4 are optional for the imageRUNNER 2016, and paper drawers 3
and 4 are optional for the imageRUNNER 2020.
Available Paper Stock
2-25
Checking and Canceling a Job
3
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to check the counter, and how to use the System Monitor screen
to confirm/cancel copy, fax, and print jobs.
Checking the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Checking Job Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Using the Stop Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Using the System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
3-1
Checking the Counter
You can check counter totals of copy, fax, and print jobs.
Counter
Check
1
Press [Counter Check] on the control panel.
3
ON/OFF
Checking and Canceling a Job
System Monitor
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
Reset
ew Settings
Counter
Check
SYMBOLS
Tone
Additional
Functions
Stop
Log In/Out
Clear
Start
2
Press [
] or [
want to check.
] to select the type of counter totals you
COUNT CHECK XXX00001
101:TOTAL :1 :000062
The various counts are shown on the LCD display.
Screen Examples:
<101:TOTAL :1>: This displays the total number of output pages for all sizes of
copy, fax, and print jobs.
<103:TOTAL :L>: This displays the number of large size pages (11" × 17" and
free sizes) that have been used for copy, fax, and print jobs.
<201:COPY :T1>: This displays the total amount of pages that have been used
for copy jobs.
<203:COPY :L>:
Stop
3-2
3
This displays the number of large size pages (11" × 17" and
free sizes) that have been used for copy jobs.
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Checking the Counter
Checking Job Status
When you press the System Monitor key, the job status display appears. You can
check the status of copy, fax send/receive, print, or report jobs.
1
System Monitor
Press [System Monitor].
COPY STATUS
SELECT JOB TO CANCEL
The System Monitor screen appears on the LCD display.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] to select the job you want to check ➞
You can select <COPY STATUS>, <RX/TX STATUS>, <TX/RX LOG>, <PRINT
STATUS>, or <REPORT STATUS>.
COPY STATUS
SELECT JOB TO CANCEL
0100 17:00 PRINTING
1 X 1 / 34
NOTE
• The Fax function is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
• To check the status of print jobs sent from a computer, see the PCL/UFR II Printer
Guide or UFR II Printer Guide.
Checking Job Status
3-3
3
Checking and Canceling a Job
NOTE
To be able to check <TX/RX LOG> from the System Monitor screen, <CHECKING THE
LOG> from the <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu must be set to 'ON'. For more information,
see "Checking the TX/RX Log," on p. 6-30.
3
Press [
] or [
] to scroll through the list of jobs.
0100 17:00 PRINTING
1 x 1 / 34
0101 15:00
0 x 0 / 25
The current job is displayed first.
Stop
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Checking and Canceling a Job
3
3-4
Checking Job Status
Canceling a Job
You can cancel a job in two ways: using the Stop key and using the System Monitor
screen.
NOTE
You can cancel a fax job only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
3
Stop
1
Checking and Canceling a Job
Using the Stop Key
Press [Stop].
● If you press
platen glass:
(Stop) while scanning originals placed on the
STOP KEY PRESSED
OK
❑ Press [OK].
Scanning stops, and the job is canceled.
● If you press
(Stop) while scanning originals placed in the
optional feeder, or during a direct send job:
STOP KEY PRESSED
PRESS OK KEY
OK
❑ Press [OK].
Scanning stops, and the job is canceled.
NOTE
If you press
(Stop) while the machine is scanning an original placed in the
optional feeder, this may cause a paper jam. For instructions on clearing paper
jams in the optional feeder, see "Feeder (DADF-P1) (Optional)," on p. 8-20.
Canceling a Job
3-5
● If you press
(Stop) after printing has started, or while a job
stored in memory is being sent:
CANCEL COPYING?
< YES
NO >
CANCEL DURING TX/RX?
< YES
NO >
❑ Press [
] to select <YES>.
If you do not want to cancel the job, press [
Checking and Canceling a Job
3
] to select <NO>.
You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and
cancel one job at a time.
The job is canceled.
Using the System Monitor Screen
You can cancel a job from the System Monitor screen during printing or while it is
waiting to be processed.
1
System Monitor
Press [System Monitor].
COPY STATUS
SELECT JOB TO CANCEL
The System Monitor screen appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] to select the job you want to cancel ➞
You can select <COPY STATUS>, <RX/TX STATUS>, <PRINT STATUS>, or
<REPORT STATUS>.
REPORT STATUS
SELECT JOB TO CANCEL
0001 17:00
*
USER DATA LIST
NOTE
The Fax function is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
3-6
Canceling a Job
3
Press [
] or [
] to scroll through the list of jobs.
0001 17:00
*
USER DATA LIST
0101 15:30
OTHER
The current job is displayed first.
OK
4
Press [OK].
CANCEL REPORT?
< YES
NO >
A confirmation message appears.
5
Press [
] to select <YES>.
Repeat steps 3 to 5 to cancel another job.
The selected job is canceled.
NOTE
• If you do not want to cancel the job, press [
] to select <NO>.
• You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel one
job at a time.
Stop
6
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Canceling a Job
3-7
3
Checking and Canceling a Job
NOTE
• The messages and symbols displayed on the Copy Status screens are as follows:
- <PRINTING> = Current job
- A dash (-) = Reserved jobs
• The symbols displayed on the Report Status and Print Status screens are as
follows:
- An asterisk (∗) = Current job
- A dash (-) = Reserved jobs
Optional Equipment
4
CHAPTER
This chapter describes the uses of optional equipment, and their special functions.
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Sample System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Available Combination of Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Feeder (DADF-P1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Platen Cover Type J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Finisher-U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Finishing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Card Reader-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Procedure before Using the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Procedure after Using the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Cassette Feeding Module-J1/K1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Optional Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
4-1
System Configuration
This section provides you with illustrations of all the optional equipment that can be
attached to the machine, and shows you examples of different system
configurations.
Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
4
4-2
System Configuration
Originals placed in the feeder are automatically
fed sheet by sheet to the scanning area. The
feeder also automatically turns over two-sided
originals to make one- or two-sided copies.
b Additional Finisher Tray-C1
The Additional Finisher Tray-C1 can be attached
to the optional Finisher-U1 to provide an
additional paper output tray.
c Finisher-U1
The Finisher-U1 is equipped with the following
features: Collate, Offset, Group, and Staple.
d Cassette Feeding Module-J1
(For the imageRUNNER 2016 Only)
The Cassette Feeding Module-J1 provides an
additional paper source for printing jobs. The
paper drawer holds up to 250 sheets of paper
(20 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
e Cassette Feeding Module-K1
The Cassette Feeding Module-K1 provides two
additional sources of paper for printing jobs. Each
paper drawer holds up to 250 sheets of paper
(20 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
f Duplex Unit-A1
The Duplex Unit-A1 enables you to use the
Two-sided mode for copying or faxing.
g Fax Panel-A1 (with Super G3 FAX Board)
The Fax Panel-A1 and Super G3 FAX Board are
required to use the Fax function.
h Platen Cover Type J
The Platen Cover Type J secures the originals
placed on the platen glass.
i Card Reader-E1
The Card Reader-E1 enables Department ID
Management to be performed automatically.
j Document Tray-J1
Located on the top right side of the machine, and
can be used for originals waiting to be scanned,
or that have already been scanned. You can also
use the document tray for storing the manuals
required for operating the machine inside.
k Inner 2 Way Tray-E1
Prints can be delivered to both the main tray and
the Inner 2 Way Tray-E1.
NOTE
• Either the optional Platen Glass Type J or Feeder (DADF-P1) can be attached to the
main unit.
• The optional Inner 2 Way Tray-E1 cannot be used with the optional Finisher-U1 and
Additional Finisher Tray-C1.
System Configuration
4-3
4
Optional Equipment
a Feeder (DADF-P1)
Sample System Configurations
Different optional equipment can be attached to the machine to form various
system configurations. The illustrations below are only examples of some of the
possible system configurations. For information on the complete range of optional
equipment configurations, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
The optional Platen Cover Type J,
Finisher-U1, Additional Finisher
Tray-C1, and Cassette Feeding
Module-J1 are attached.
The optional Fax Panel-A1 (with Super G3
FAX Board), Feeder (DADF-P1), Inner 2 Way
Tray-E1, Cassette Feeding Module-K1, and
Card Reader-E1 are attached.
Optional Equipment
4
The optional Fax Panel-A1 (with Super G3 FAX Board),
Feeder (DADF-P1), Finisher-U1, Additional Finisher Tray-C1,
and Cassette Feeding Module-J1 and -K1 are attached.
4-4
System Configuration
System Options
Installing system related optional accessories enables you to expand the
functionality of the machine. This section describes the system related optional
accessories and their functions.
■ PCL Printer Kit-J1
The PCL Printer Kit-J1 supports PCL5e and PCL6 emulation printing solutions.
■ Fax Panel-A1 and Super G3 FAX Board
Installing the Fax Panel-A1 and Super G3 FAX Board enables you to fax documents that
have been created in applications directly from your PC via a network.
NOTE
The Canon Fax Driver is supplied with the Super G3 FAX Board, and enables you to
send fax images from a computer via the machine.
Optional Equipment
4
System Configuration
4-5
Available Combination of Options
This table describes the optional equipment that is needed to use each function,
the available combination of options that can be installed simultaneously, and the
limitations when installing optional equipment.
Machine Function
Copy Function
Optional Equipment
Needed
Simultaneous Installation
Required
Limitations
–
The Platen Cover
Type J and Feeder
(DADF-P1) cannot be
installed together. If
only the Platen Cover
Type J is attached,
some functions may
be unavailable.
Platen Cover Type J
or Feeder (DADF-P1)
–
The Platen Cover
Type J and Feeder
(DADF-P1) cannot be
installed together. If
only the Platen Cover
Type J is attached,
some functions may
be unavailable.
Super G3 FAX Board
–
–
Fax Panel-A1
–
–
PCL Printer Kit-J1
–
–
Platen Cover Type J
or Feeder (DADF-P1)
Optional Equipment
4
Fax Function
PCL Printer Function
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1
–
The Inner 2 Way
Tray-E1 cannot be
used with the
Finisher-U1.
Additional Finisher
Tray-C1
–
The Finisher-U1 must
be activated.
–
The Inner 2 Way
Tray-E1 cannot be
used with the
Finisher-U1.
Additional Copy Tray
Collate
Group
Offset
Staple
4-6
System Configuration
Finisher-U1
Simultaneous Installation
Machine Function
Optional Equipment
Needed
Required
Limitations
Two-Sided Copying/
Faxing*1
Duplex Unit-A1
–
–
Department ID
Management*2
Card Reader-E1
–
–
Additional Paper
Supply
Cassette Feeding
Module-J1 or -K1
–
Cassette Feeding
Module-J1 cannot be
used with the
imageRUNNER 2020.
*1 When the optional Duplex Unit-A1 is installed, you can set to print received fax documents on both sides of the
record paper.
4
Optional Equipment
*2 The Department ID Management function is a standard function in this machine. If the optional Card Reader-E1 is
attached, Department ID Management is performed automatically, and you do not have to enter the Department ID
and password manually. The Card Reader-E1 enables you to check the print totals and the remaining number of
pages that can be printed on the LCD display.
System Configuration
4-7
Feeder (DADF-P1)
Originals placed in the feeder are automatically fed sheet by sheet to the scanning
area. The feeder also automatically turns over two-sided originals to make one- or
two-sided copies.
CAUTION
Do not insert your fingers into the gaps around the original supply tray, as your
fingers may get caught. Also, be careful not to drop objects, such as paper clips
into the gaps, as doing so may cause damage to the machine or cause it to
break down.
4
Optional Equipment
IMPORTANT
• When using the platen glass to copy or scan thick originals, such as books or magazines,
do not press down hard on the feeder.
• If the original output area is blocked, originals may get damaged, and printing may not be
performed correctly. Therefore, do not place any objects in the original output area.
4-8
Feeder (DADF-P1)
Parts and Their Functions
a Feeder Cover
Open this cover to remove jammed originals.
b Slide Guides
Adjust the slide guides to match the width of the
originals.
c Original Supply Tray
Originals placed here are automatically fed sheet
by sheet to the scanning area. Place originals into
this tray with the surface that you want to scan
face up.
d Original Output Area
Originals that have been scanned from the
original supply tray are output to the original
output area in the order that they are fed into the
feeder.
Feeder (DADF-P1)
4-9
Optional Equipment
4
Platen Cover Type J
The Platen Cover Type J secures originals that are placed on the platen glass for
copying.
Parts and Their Functions
Optional Equipment
4
a Platen Cover
Close the platen cover to secure originals that
have been placed on the platen glass.
4-10
Platen Cover Type J
Finisher-U1
The Finisher-U1 is equipped with the following modes: Collate, Group, Offset, and
Staple. (See "Finishing Modes," on p. 4-12.)
IMPORTANT
The Finisher-U1 cannot be installed with the optional Inner 2 Way Tray-E1.
Parts and Their Functions
Optional Equipment
4
a Front Cover of the Finisher-U1
Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge in
the stapler unit, or to clear a staple jam. For
instructions on replacing the staple cartridge, see
"Replacing the Staple Cartridge," on p. 7-20. For
instructions on clearing a staple jam, see
"Clearing Staple Jams," on p. 8-32.
c Auxiliary Tray
If you are printing on large size paper, such as
11" × 17", LGL, or LTRR, pull out the auxiliary
tray.
d Output Tray
Prints are output to this tray.
b Additional Finisher Tray-C1
The Additional Finisher Tray-C1 can be attached
to the optional Finisher-U1 to provide an
additional paper output tray.
Finisher-U1
4-11
Finishing Modes
The Finisher-U1 is equipped with the following finishing modes.
CAUTION
• Do not place anything other than output paper in the trays of the finisher, as this
may damage the trays.
• Do not place anything under the trays of the finisher, as this may damage the
trays.
Optional Equipment
4
NOTE
If the Collate or Group mode is set, the output tray moves downward as the stack of
paper that is output increases in quantity and thickness. Once the output tray has
reached its stacking limit, printing stops temporarily. Remove all of the prints from the
output tray, and printing resumes.
■ Collate Mode
The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order.
■ Group Mode
All prints of the same original page are grouped together.
■ Offset Mode
The print output is shifted alternately to the front and back of the tray, in a vertical (portrait)
orientation, or a horizontal (landscape) orientation, depending on the orientation of your
originals. For example, if you place LTRR originals, the paper is output and shifted in the
horizontal direction. If you place LTR originals, the paper is output and shifted in the
vertical direction.
IMPORTANT
You can offset 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR paper.
4-12
Finisher-U1
■ Staple Mode
The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order and stapled. Prints
are stapled in the following places:
• If an original is placed on the platen glass:
Copies are stapled here.
Copies are stapled here.
4
Copies are stapled here.
Optional Equipment
• If originals are placed in the optional feeder:
Copies are stapled here.
ABC
ABC
Finisher-U1
4-13
CAUTION
Do not place your hand in the part of the tray where stapling is performed if a
finisher is attached, as this may result in personal injury.
4
Optional Equipment
IMPORTANT
• If the Staple mode is set, the output tray moves downward as the stack of paper that is
output increases in quantity and thickness. Once the output tray has reached its stacking
limit, printing and stapling stop temporarily. Remove all of the stapled prints from the
output tray, and printing and stapling resume.
• Only the following paper sizes can be stapled: 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR.
• You cannot staple envelopes, transparencies, or labels.
• Do not pull copies or prints out of the output area while they are being stapled. Remove
the copies or prints after they are output to the output tray.
NOTE
• The maximum number of sheets, including cover sheets, that can be stapled together is
as follows (only 17 to 20 lb bond (64 to 80 g/m2) paper can be used for the main
document, and 17 to 32 lb bond (64 to 128 g/m2) paper can be used for the cover page):
- LTR
50 sheets (17 to 20 lb bond (64 to 80 g/m2))
- 11" × 17", LGL, LTRR
30 sheets (17 to 20 lb bond (64 to 80 g/m2))
• If the machine stops while stapling and the message <OUT OF STAPLES/REPLACE
STAPLE CART.> appears, all of the staples have been used, and the staple cartridge
must be replaced. (See "Replacing the Staple Cartridge," on p. 7-20.)
4-14
Finisher-U1
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1
If you attach the Inner 2 Way Tray-E1 to the machine, prints can be delivered to
both the main tray and the Inner 2 Way Tray-E1.
When the Inner 2 Way Tray-E1 is attached to the machine, only the Collate mode is
available. Prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order before
they are delivered to the Inner 2 Way Tray-E1.
IMPORTANT
If the optional Finisher-U1 is attached, the Inner 2 Way Tray-E1 cannot be attached.
4
Optional Equipment
Parts and Their Functions
a Inner 2 Way Tray (Tray A)
b Main Output Tray (Tray B)
Prints are output to this tray.
Prints are output to this tray.
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1
4-15
Card Reader-E1
If the Card Reader-E1 is attached to the machine, you must insert a control card to
operate it. The Card Reader-E1 performs Department ID Management
automatically.
NOTE
• If the Standby display does not appear when the control card is inserted, make sure that:
- The control card is inserted in the correct direction.
- The control card is inserted as far as it can go.
- An unusable control card is not inserted. (For example, cards which are damaged or
cards prohibited from use.)
• Insert a usable control card correctly.
• For instructions on turning the power ON, see "Main Power and Control Panel Power," on
p. 1-20.
• If the Card Reader-E1 is attached, only the type of card shown below can be used. An
optical type card can manage up to 300 departments.
Optional Equipment
4
Optical Type Card
4-16
Card Reader-E1
Procedure before Using the Machine
Insert the control card into the card slot, making sure that it is
facing in the correct direction.
4
Optional Equipment
1
The Standby display appears.
100% AUTO
A TEXT
O1
Card Reader-E1
4-17
Procedure after Using the Machine
1
After you finish using the machine, remove the control card.
Optional Equipment
4
The LCD display returns to the screen for inserting the control card.
INSERT CONTROL CARD
IMPORTANT
• Once you have removed the control card, you cannot operate the machine until the
control card is inserted again.
• The control card must remain inserted until copying is complete.
4-18
Card Reader-E1
Department ID Management
This section describes how to change the password and page limit, and how to
check the print totals when a control card is being used.
NOTE
• The maximum number of digits that you can store for the password is seven. If you enter
fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
• You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages.
Changing the Password and Page Limit
1
Press [Additional Functions].
4
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
OK
ADD. FUNCTIONS
9.SYSTEM SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.SYS. MANAGER INFO
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <MANAGE DEPT. ID> appears ➞
SYSTEM SETTINGS
3.MANAGE DEPT. ID
MANAGE DEPT. ID
ON
The <MANAGE DEPT. ID> menu appears.
Card Reader-E1
4-19
Optional Equipment
Additional
Functions
4
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <REGISTER DEPT. ID> appears ➞
MANAGE DEPT. ID
1.REGISTER DEPT. ID
5
OK
REGISTER DEPT. ID
0001:
0000001
Press [
] or [
] to display the Department ID whose
password and page limit you want to change ➞ press [OK].
REGISTER DEPT. ID
0001:
0000001
REGISTER DEPT. ID
0000001
NOTE
Press and hold down [
] or [
] to quickly and continuously scroll through
the registered Department IDs. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large number
of Department IDs are registered.
Optional Equipment
4
OK
6
Press [OK].
REGISTER DEPT. ID
0000001
7
OK
Clear
C
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
PASSWORD
0000123
Press [Clear] to clear the current password.
PASSWORD
4-20
] until <PASSWORD> appears ➞
REGISTER DEPT. ID
1.PASSWORD
8
REGISTER DEPT. ID
1.PASSWORD
Card Reader-E1
0000123
PASSWORD
0000000
ABC
DEF
2
1
GHI
JKL
4
PQRS
3
Enter the new password (up to seven digits) using the
numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
6
5
TUV
WXYZ
8
7
9
MNO
9
You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
SYMBOLS
Tone
0
#
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
OK
PASSWORD
1234567
REGISTER DEPT. ID
2.PAGE LIMIT SET.
The new password is stored.
10
OK
(Clear) to clear the
4
] until <PAGE LIMIT SET.> appears ➞
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
REGISTER DEPT. ID
2.PAGE LIMIT SET.
11
C
PAGE LIMIT SET.
1.TOTAL PRINT
Select the desired function.
● If you want to change a restriction for the total number of prints and
copies:
❑ Press [
OK
] or [
] until <TOTAL PRINT> appears ➞ press [OK].
PAGE LIMIT SET.
1.TOTAL PRINT
TOTAL PRINT
1.RESTRICT TOTAL
NOTE
<TOTAL PRINT> is the sum of <COPY LIMIT> and <PRINT LIMIT>.
❑ Press [
OK
Clear
C
] or [
] until <PAGE TOTALS> appears ➞ press [OK].
PAGE TOTALS
TOTAL PRINT
2.PAGE TOTALS
001000
❑ Press [Clear] to clear the current number of page limit restriction.
PAGE TOTALS
001000
PAGE TOTALS
000000
Card Reader-E1
4-21
Optional Equipment
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering the password, press
password ➞ enter the correct password.
• You cannot change the Department ID.
ABC
DEF
2
1
GHI
JKL
4
PQRS
3
MNO
6
5
TUV
❑ Enter the maximum number of copies and prints that can be made by the
registered Department ID using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
WXYZ
8
7
9
PAGE TOTALS
SYMBOLS
Tone
#
0
001200
OK
PAGE LIMIT SET.
2.COPY
The Total Print Limit is changed.
● If you want to change a page limit restriction for copying:
❑ Press [
] until <COPY> appears ➞ press [OK].
PAGE LIMIT SET.
2.COPY
OK
❑ Press [
4
Optional Equipment
] or [
] or [
] until <COPY LIMIT> appears ➞ press [OK].
C
COPY LIMIT
ABC
DEF
2
1
JKL
3
MNO
4
PQRS
005000
❑ Press [Clear] to clear the current number of page limit restriction.
Clear
GHI
COPY LIMIT
COPY
2.COPY LIMIT
OK
COPY
1.RESTRICT COPY
6
5
TUV
005000
COPY LIMIT
000000
❑ Enter the maximum number of pages that can be copied by the registered
Department ID using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
WXYZ
8
7
9
COPY LIMIT
SYMBOLS
Tone
0
#
004500
OK
PAGE LIMIT SET.
3.SCAN
The Copy Limit is changed.
● If you want to change a page limit restriction for scanning:
IMPORTANT
<SCAN> is displayed only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
❑ Press [
] until <SCAN> appears ➞ press [OK].
PAGE LIMIT SET.
3.SCAN
OK
❑ Press [
] or [
Card Reader-E1
SCAN
1.RESTRICT B&W SCAN
] until <SCAN LIMIT> appears ➞ press [OK].
SCAN
2.SCAN LIMIT
OK
4-22
] or [
SCAN LIMIT
005000
❑ Press [Clear] to clear the current number of page limit restriction.
Clear
C
SCAN LIMIT
ABC
DEF
2
1
GHI
JKL
4
PQRS
3
MNO
6
5
TUV
000000
❑ Enter the maximum number of pages that can be scanned by the registered
Department ID using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
WXYZ
8
7
005000
SCAN LIMIT
9
SYMBOLS
Tone
#
0
SCAN LIMIT
004500
OK
PAGE LIMIT SET.
4.PRINT
The Scan Limit is changed.
● If you want to change a page limit restriction for printing:
] or [
PAGE LIMIT SET.
4.PRINT
OK
❑ Press [
] or [
C
PRINT LIMIT
ABC
4
3
MNO
6
5
TUV
7
Tone
DEF
2
JKL
PQRS
PRINT
1.RESTRICT PRINT
PRINT LIMIT
000500
❑ Press [Clear] to clear the current number of page limit restriction.
Clear
1
4
] until <PRINT LIMIT> appears ➞ press [OK].
PRINT
2.PRINT LIMIT
OK
GHI
] until <PRINT> appears ➞ press [OK].
000500
PRINT LIMIT
000000
❑ Enter the maximum number of pages that can be printed by the registered
Department ID using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
WXYZ
8
9
SYMBOLS
0
OK
#
PRINT LIMIT
010000
REGISTER DEPT. ID
3.ERASE
The Print Limit is changed.
IMPORTANT
• The machine stops sending a fax if the Scan Limit is reached while faxing a
document directly to the recipient.
• The machine stops scanning if the Scan Limit is reached while the machine is
scanning originals that are being fed from the optional feeder. (Those originals that
were scanned before the limit is reached are not added to the scan count.)
Card Reader-E1
4-23
Optional Equipment
❑ Press [
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering a number, press C (Clear) to clear the
number ➞ enter the correct number.
• You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once a page limit is reached,
copying, scanning, or printing is not possible.
• The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print
is counted as two pages.
Stop
12
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
NOTE
For instructions on entering the Department ID and password, see "Entering the
Department ID and Password," on p. 2-11.
Checking Counter Information
Optional Equipment
4
You can check the page counts on the control card you are currently using.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Changing the Password
and Page Limit," on p. 4-19.
OK
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <MANAGE DEPT. ID> appears ➞
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "Changing the Password and Page
Limit," on p. 4-19.
OK
The <MANAGE DEPT. ID> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
[OK].
] or [
] until <PAGE TOTALS> appears ➞ press
MANAGE DEPT. ID
2.PAGE TOTALS
The <PAGE TOTALS> menu appears.
4-24
Card Reader-E1
PAGE TOTALS
1.VIEW PAGE TOTALS
4
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <VIEW PAGE TOTALS> appears ➞
PAGE TOTALS
1.VIEW PAGE TOTALS
5
VIEW PAGE TOTALS
1.TOTAL PRINT
Select the desired function.
● If you want to view the counter information for prints and copies:
OK
] or [
] until <TOTAL PRINT> appears ➞ press [OK].
TOTAL PRINT
1234567
VIEW PAGE TOTALS
1.TOTAL PRINT
500
NOTE
<TOTAL PRINT> is the sum of <COPY LIMIT> and <PRINT LIMIT>.
❑ Press [
] or [
] to display the desired Department ID ➞ check the
counter information ➞ proceed to step 6.
OK
TOTAL PRINT
1234567
500
TOTAL PRINT
2222222
100
NOTE
Press and hold down [
] or [
] to quickly and continuously scroll
through the registered Department IDs. Continuous scrolling is useful
when a large number of Department IDs are registered.
● If you want to view the counter information for copies:
❑ Press [
OK
] or [
] until <COPY> appears ➞ press [OK].
COPY
1234567
VIEW PAGE TOTALS
2.COPY
500
❑ Press [
] or [
] to display the desired Department ID ➞ check the
counter information ➞ proceed to step 6.
OK
COPY
1234567
500
COPY
2222222
100
NOTE
Press and hold down [
] or [
] to quickly and continuously scroll
through the registered Department IDs. Continuous scrolling is useful
when a large number of Department IDs are registered.
Card Reader-E1
4-25
4
Optional Equipment
❑ Press [
● If you want to view the counter information for fax document scans:
IMPORTANT
<SCAN> is displayed only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
❑ Press [
] or [
] until <SCAN> appears ➞ press [OK].
SCAN
1234567
VIEW PAGE TOTALS
3.SCAN
OK
500
❑ Press [
] or [
] to display the desired Department ID ➞ check the
counter information ➞ proceed to step 6.
SCAN
1234567
OK
SCAN
2222222
100
NOTE
Press and hold down [
] or [
] to quickly and continuously scroll
through the registered Department IDs. Continuous scrolling is useful
when a large number of Department IDs are registered.
4
Optional Equipment
500
● If you want to view the counter information for prints:
❑ Press [
] or [
] until <PRINT> appears ➞ press [OK].
PRINT
1234567
VIEW PAGE TOTALS
4.PRINT
OK
500
❑ Press [
] or [
] to display the desired Department ID ➞ check the
counter information ➞ proceed to step 6.
PRINT
1234567
OK
500
PRINT
2222222
100
NOTE
Press and hold down [
] or [
] to quickly and continuously scroll
through the registered Department IDs. Continuous scrolling is useful
when a large number of Department IDs are registered.
Stop
4-26
6
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Card Reader-E1
Printing Counter Information
You can print a list of how many papers were used by each department.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Changing the Password
and Page Limit," on p. 4-19.
OK
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <MANAGE DEPT. ID> appears ➞
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "Changing the Password and Page
Limit," on p. 4-19.
OK
3
Press [
[OK].
] or [
] until <PAGE TOTALS> appears ➞ press
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "Checking Counter Information," on
p. 4-24.
OK
The <PAGE TOTALS> menu appears.
4
OK
Press [
] or [
PAGE TOTALS
3.PRINT LIST
] to select <PRINT LIST> ➞ press [OK].
100% AUTO
A TEXT
O1
Printing starts, and the screen automatically returns to the Standby display.
NOTE
The counter information can be printed only if 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR (plain,
recycled, or color paper) is loaded in a paper source that is set to 'ON' when you
select 'OTHER' for a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in COMMON
SETTINGS (from the Additional Functions menu). (See "Auto Paper Selection/Auto
Drawer Switching," on p. 5-23.)
Card Reader-E1
4-27
4
Optional Equipment
2
Clearing Page Totals
You can clear the page totals made for all departments or for specific departments.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Changing the Password
and Page Limit," on p. 4-19.
OK
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
Optional Equipment
4
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <MANAGE DEPT. ID> appears ➞
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "Changing the Password and Page
Limit," on p. 4-19.
OK
The <MANAGE DEPT. ID> menu appears.
3
Press [
[OK].
] or [
] until <PAGE TOTALS> appears ➞ press
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "Checking Counter Information," on
p. 4-24.
OK
The <PAGE TOTALS> menu appears.
4
OK
4-28
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <CLEAR ALL TOTAL> appears ➞
PAGE TOTALS
2.CLEAR ALL TOTAL
Card Reader-E1
CLEAR ALL TOTAL
OFF
5
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to clear the page totals, select <OFF>.
OK
CLEAR ALL TOTAL
ON
PAGE TOTALS
3.PRINT LIST
The page totals are cleared.
Stop
6
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs
You can specify whether to accept or reject print jobs from computers that do not
correspond with a registered Department ID.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Changing the Password
and Page Limit," on p. 4-19.
OK
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <MANAGE DEPT. ID> appears ➞
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "Changing the Password and Page
Limit," on p. 4-19.
OK
The <MANAGE DEPT. ID> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <PDL JOBS W/OUT ID> appears
MANAGE DEPT. ID
3.PDL JOBS W/OUT ID
PDL JOBS W/OUT ID
ON
Card Reader-E1
4-29
Optional Equipment
4
NOTE
The default setting is 'ON'.
4
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> or <OFF> ➞ press [OK].
PDL JOBS W/OUT ID
OK
ON
SYSTEM SETTINGS
4.MANAGE USER ID
Details of each item are shown below.
<ON>: The machine accepts print jobs from computers that do not correspond
with a registered Department ID.
<OFF>: The machine does not accept print jobs from computers that do not
correspond with a registered Department ID, and you must insert a
control card to operate the machine.
The selected mode is set.
Stop
5
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Optional Equipment
4
4-30
Card Reader-E1
Cassette Feeding Module-J1/K1
If you attach the Cassette Feeding Module-J1 (available only for the
imageRUNNER 2016), you have one additional paper source for print jobs. If you
attach the Cassette Feeding Module-K1 to the machine, you have two additional
paper sources for print jobs. Each cassette holds up to 250 sheets (20 lb bond
(80 g/m2)) of 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, or STMT paper.
Parts and Their Functions
4
Cassette Feeding Module-K1
Optional Equipment
Cassette Feeding Module-J1
a Paper Drawers
Each paper drawer holds up to 250 sheets of
paper (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
b Paper Drawer’s Left Cover
Open this cover to remove jammed paper.
Cassette Feeding Module-J1/K1
4-31
Optional Accessory
■ FL Cassette-AC1
This cassette can be adjusted to hold various paper sizes. (See "Adjusting a Paper
Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size," on p. 7-7.)
- Available Locations: Paper drawers 1, 2, 3, or 4
- Available Paper Sizes: 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, or STMT
Optional Equipment
4
4-32
Cassette Feeding Module-J1/K1
Customizing Settings
5
CHAPTER
This chapter explains how to change the machine’s Common Settings and Timer Settings,
customize them to suit your needs, and how to print reports.
What Are Additional Functions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Opening the Additional Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Specifying Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Default Display after Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Tone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Setting the Toner Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Adjusting the Print Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Output Tray Designation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Changing the Language Shown on the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Displaying a Feeder Error Message Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Timer Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Setting the Date Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Auto Sleep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Auto Clear Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Daylight Saving Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Speed Dialing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Speed Dialing Lists (Detailed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49
User’s Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
5-1
What Are Additional Functions?
Additional Functions enable you to customize the machine’s various settings.
NOTE
Settings specified from the Additional Functions menu are never changed, even if you
press
(Reset).
Opening the Additional Functions Menu
Additional
Functions
1
5
Press [Additional Functions].
Customizing Settings
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
The Additional Functions menu appears.
2
Press [
] or [
] until the desired menu item that you
want to set or change appears ➞ press [OK].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
OK
COMMON SETTINGS
1.DEFAULT SETTINGS
There are nine Additional Functions menu items.
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
ADD. FUNCTIONS
9.SYSTEM SETTINGS
NOTE
Displaying menu items by pressing [
] or [
] is rotational. For example, if
you press [
] when the first menu is displayed, the menu rotates to the last
menu item. Also, if you press [
] when the last menu item is displayed, the
menu rotates to the first menu item.
Stop
5-2
3
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
What Are Additional Functions?
Additional Functions Settings Table
The following settings can be selected or stored from the Additional Functions
menu. Some functions can only be used when optional equipment is attached. For
more information, consult the following guides:
• Fax
Settings:
Copying Guide
Settings and Report Settings:
• Printer
Settings and Report Settings:
Facsimile Guide
PCL/UFR II Printer Guide or
UFR II Printer Guide
• Network
Settings and Report Settings:
Network Guide
• Remote
UI Settings:
Remote UI Guide
5
■ COMMON SETTINGS
Additional Functions
Settings
Applicable
Page
1. DEFAULT SETTINGS**
COPY*, FAX
p. 5-15
2. AUTO CLEAR SET.
INITIAL FUNCTION*, SELECTED
FUNCTION
p. 5-17
ENTRY TONE: ON*, OFF
ERROR TONE: ON*, OFF
TX JOB DONE TONE**: ERROR ONLY*,
ON, OFF
3. AUDIBLE TONES
RX JOB DONE TONE**: ERROR ONLY*,
ON, OFF
p. 5-19
SCAN DONE TONE: ERROR ONLY*, ON,
OFF
PRINT DONE TONE: ERROR ONLY*, ON,
OFF
4. TONER SAVER MODE
OFF*, HIGH, LOW
p. 5-21
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
Additional Functions Settings Table
5-3
Customizing Settings
• Copy
■ COMMON SETTINGS Table Continued
Additional Functions
5. PRINTER DENSITY
Customizing Settings
5
Settings
1 to 9; 5*
Applicable
Page
p. 5-22
COPY:
DRAWER 1:
DRAWER 2**:
DRAWER 3**:
DRAWER 4**:
STACK BYPASS:
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON, OFF*
PRINTER:
DRAWER 1:
DRAWER 2**:
DRAWER 3**:
DRAWER 4**:
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
p. 5-23
6. AUTO DRAWER SELCT FAX**:
DRAWER 1:
DRAWER 2**:
DRAWER 3**:
DRAWER 4**:
STACK BYPASS:
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON, OFF*
OTHER:
DRAWER 1:
DRAWER 2**:
DRAWER 3**:
DRAWER 4**:
STACK BYPASS:
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON, OFF*
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
5-4
Additional Functions Settings Table
■ COMMON SETTINGS Table Continued
Settings
DRAWER 1:
7. SELECT PAPER TYPE
Applicable
Page
PLAIN PAPER*, COLOR,
RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER
1, BOND, 3HOLE PUNCH
PAPER
DRAWER 2**: PLAIN PAPER*, COLOR,
RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER
1, BOND, 3HOLE PUNCH
PAPER
DRAWER 3**: PLAIN PAPER*, COLOR,
RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER
1, BOND, 3HOLE PUNCH
PAPER
p. 5-25
DRAWER 4**: PLAIN PAPER*, COLOR,
RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER
1, BOND, 3HOLE PUNCH
PAPER
8. ENERGY IN SLEEP
9. TRAY DESIGNATION**
LOW*, HIGH
5
p. 5-26
TRAY A:
COPY:
PRINTER:
FAX:
OTHER:
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
TRAY B:
COPY:
PRINTER:
FAX:
OTHER:
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
ON*, OFF
p. 5-28
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
Additional Functions Settings Table
5-5
Customizing Settings
Additional Functions
■ COMMON SETTINGS Table Continued
Additional Functions
10. BYPASS STD SET
5
Settings
ON, OFF*:
PAPER SIZE: LTR*, STMTR, STMT,
EXECUTIV, COM10,
MONARCH, DL, ISO-C5,
ISO-B5, FREESIZE, A4,
A4R, A3, B4, B5R, B5,
A5R, A5, 11 × 17, LGL,
LTRR
SELECT PAPER TYPE: PLAIN PAPER*,
COLOR, RECYCLED,
HEAVY PAPER 1,
HEAVY PAPER 2,
HEAVY PAPER 3, BOND,
3HOLE PUNCH PAPER,
TRANSPARENCY,
LABELS, ENVELOPE
Applicable
Page
p. 5-30
Customizing Settings
STACK BYPASS: SPEED PRIORITY*,
PRINT SIDE
DRAWER 1: SPEED PRIORITY*, PRINT
SIDE
11. PAPER FEED SWITCH
DRAWER 2**: SPEED PRIORITY*, PRINT
SIDE
p. 5-33
DRAWER 3**: SPEED PRIORITY*, PRINT
SIDE
DRAWER 4**: SPEED PRIORITY*, PRINT
SIDE
12. DISPLAY LANGUAGE
ENGLISH*, FRENCH, SPANISH,
PORTUGUESE
p. 5-35
13. ADF DIRTY ERROR
DISPLAY*, DO NOT DISPLAY
p. 5-36
14. INIT. COMMON SET.
ON, OFF*
p. 5-37
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
5-6
Additional Functions Settings Table
■ COPY SETTINGS
Additional Functions
Settings
1. IMAGE DIR PRIORTY
ON, OFF*
2. AUTO ORIENTATION
ON*, OFF
Applicable
Page
IMAGE QUALITY: TEXT*, PHOTO, TEXT/
PHOTO
DENSITY: AUTO*, MANUAL
ZOOM RATIO:
PRESET RATIO*, MANUAL
COPIES: 1* to 99
AUTO COLLATE: OFF*, COLLATE,
STAPLE**
3. STANDARD SETTINGS
TWO-SIDED**: OFF*, 1 > 2-SIDED,
2 > 2-SIDED, 2 > 1-SIDED,
BOOK > 2-SIDED
*1
5
Customizing Settings
FRAME ERASE: OFF*, ORG. FRAME
ERASE, BOOK FRAME
ERASE, BINDING HOLE
2-PAGE SEPARATION: ON, OFF*
PAPER SELECT: AUTO*, DRAWER 1,
DRAWER 2**, DRAWER
3**, DRAWER 4**
4. SHARPNESS
1 to 9; 5*
5. PAPER SIZE GROUP
INCHES*, A, AB
6. MM/INCH ENTRY
INCHES*, MM
7. INIT. COPY SET.
ON, OFF*
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
*1: See the Copying Guide.
Additional Functions Settings Table
5-7
■ FAX SETTINGS**
Additional Functions
Settings
Applicable
Page
UNIT TELEPHONE#
UNIT NAME
TX TERMINAL ID:
PRINTING POSITION: OUTSIDE
IMAGE*, INSIDE
IMAGE
TELEPHONE# MARK: FAX*, TEL
SCANNING DENSITY: 1 to 9; 5*
1. USER SETTINGS
TEL LINE TYPE: TOUCH TONE*, ROTARY
PULSE
VOLUME CONTROL: MONITOR VOL.
CTRL (0 to 3; 1*)
STANDARD SETTINGS:
DENSITY: STANDARD*, DK, LT
IMAGE QUALITY: STANDARD*, FINE,
PHOTO, SUPER
FINE, ULTRA FINE
DIRECT TX: ON, OFF*
STAMP DOCUMENT: ON, OFF*
Customizing Settings
5
INIT. FAX STD SET: ON, OFF*
ECM TX: ON*, OFF
PAUSE TIME: 1 to 15 seconds; 2 SEC.*
2. TX SETTINGS
AUTO REDIAL: ON*, OFF
REDIAL TIMES: 1 to 10; 2 TIMES*
REDIAL INTERVAL: 2 to 99 minutes;
2 MIN.*
TX ERROR REDIAL: ON*, OFF
TIME OUT: ON*, OFF
STAMP DOCUMENT: DIRECT&MEMORY
TX*, DIRECT TX
DIALING LINE CHCK: ON*, OFF
ROTATE TX: ON*, OFF
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
*2: See the Facsimile Guide.
5-8
Additional Functions Settings Table
*2
■ FAX SETTINGS Table Continued**
Additional Functions
3. RX SETTINGS
Settings
Applicable
Page
ECM RX: ON*, OFF
SELECT DRAWER:
SWITCH A: ON*, OFF
SWITCH B: ON*, OFF
SWITCH C: ON*, OFF
SWITCH D: ON*, OFF
4. PRINTER SETTINGS
*2
RECEIVE REDUCTION: ON*, OFF
RECEIVE REDUCTION,
REDUCE DIRECTION
TWO-SIDED PRINT: ON, OFF*
CONT. PRINTING: RX TO MEMORY*,
KEEP PRINTING
■ ADDRESS BOOK SET.**
Additional Functions
Settings
1. 1-TOUCH SPD DIAL
Up to 60 destinations can be registered:
TEL NUMBER ENTRY, NAME, OPTIONAL
SETTING
2. CODED SPD DIAL
Up to 140 destinations can be registered:
TEL NUMBER ENTRY, NAME, OPTIONAL
SETTING
3. GROUP DIAL
Up to 199 destinations can be registered:
TEL NUMBER ENTRY, NAME
Applicable
Page
*2
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
*2: See the Facsimile Guide.
Additional Functions Settings Table
5-9
Customizing Settings
5
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
*2: See the Facsimile Guide.
■ PRINTER SETTINGS
Additional Functions
Settings
1. DEFAULT PAPERSIZE
LTR*, STMT, EXECUTIV, COM10,
MONARCH, DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5, A4, A3,
B4, B5, A5, 11 × 17, LGL
2. DEFAULT PAPERTYPE
PLAIN PAPER*, COLOR, RECYCLED,
HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, HEAVY
PAPER 3, BOND, 3HOLE PUNCH PAPER,
TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, ENVELOPE
3. COPIES
1* to 999
4. 2-SIDED PRINTING
ON, OFF*
Applicable
Page
IMAGE REFINEMENT: ON*, OFF
5. PRINT QUALITY
DENSITY: 1 to 9; 5*
TONER SAVER: ON, OFF*
5
Customizing Settings
BINDING: LONG EDGE*, SHORT EDGE
6. PAGE LAYOUT
MARGIN:
INCHES: -1.90" to +1.90"; 0"*
MM: -50 mm to +50 mm; 0 mm*
7. COLLATE
OFF*, COLLATE, OFFSET+COLLATE,
OFFSET+GROUP, STAPLE**
8. ERROR TIME OUT
ON*, OFF
TIME OUT PERIOD: 5 to 300 seconds;
15 SEC.*
9. INIT. PRINTER SET
ON, OFF*
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
*3: See the PCL/UFR II Printer Guide.
*4: See the UFR II Printer Guide.
5-10
Additional Functions Settings Table
*3, *4
■ PRINTER SETTINGS Table Continued
Additional Functions
Settings
Applicable
Page
ORIENTATION: PORTRAIT*, LANDSCAPE
FONT NUMBER: 0* to 120
POINT SIZE: 4.00 point to 999.75 point;
12 point*
PITCH: 0.44 cpi to 99.99 cpi; 10 cpi*
FORM LINES: 5 to 128 lines; 60 lines*
*3
5
Customizing Settings
10. PCL SETTINGS*5
SYMBOL SET: PC8*, PC850, PC852,
PC8DN, PC8TK, PC1004,
PIFONT, PSMATH,
PSTEXT, ROMAN8,
VNINTL, VNMATH, VNUS,
WIN30, WINBALT, WINL1,
WINL2, WINL5, DESKTOP,
ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15,
ISO17, ISO21, ISO60,
ISO69, ISOL1, ISOL2,
ISOL5, ISOL6, LEGAL,
MATH8, MCTEXT,
MSPUBL, PC775
CUSTOM PAPER: ON, OFF*
UNIT OF MEASURE
X DIMENSION
Y DIMENSION
APPEND CR TO LF: YES, NO*
ENLARGE A4: ON, OFF*
11. RESET PRINTER
ON, OFF*
*3, *4
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
*3: See the PCL/UFR II Printer Guide.
*4: See the UFR II Printer Guide.
*5: Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is
attached. Settings are not applicable in the UFR II mode.
Additional Functions Settings Table
5-11
■ TIMER SETTINGS
Additional Functions
Settings
Applicable
Page
1. DATE&TIME SETTING
Default setting
p. 5-38
2. DATE TYPE SELECT
MM/DD/YYYY*, DD/MM YYYY,
YYYY MM/DD
p. 5-40
3. AUTO SLEEP TIME
ON* (3 to 30 minutes; 5 MIN.* in one minute
increments), OFF
p. 5-41
4. AUTO CLEAR TIME
ON* (1 to 9 minutes; 2 MIN.* in one minute
increments), OFF
p. 5-42
5. DAYLIGHT SV. TIME
ON, OFF*
START DATE/TIME: MONTH, WEEK,
DAY
END DATE/TIME: MONTH, WEEK, DAY
p. 5-44
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
5
Customizing Settings
■ ADJUSTMENT/CLEANING
Additional Functions
Settings
Applicable
Page
1. TRANS. ROLR CLEAN
Press [OK].
p. 7-31
2. DRUM CLEANING
Press [OK].
p. 7-32
3. FIX. UNIT CLEANING
START CLEANING, CLEAN PAPER PRT
p. 7-33
4. FEEDER CLEANING**
Press [OK].
p. 7-30
5. SPECIAL MODE M
MID*, LOW, HIGH
p. 7-35
6. SPECIAL MODE N
ON, OFF*
p. 7-36
7. SPECIAL MODE O
DRAWER: ON, OFF*
STACK BYPASS: ON, OFF*
p. 7-37
8. SPECIAL MODE P
ON, OFF*
p. 7-38
9. BOND SP. FIX. MODE
ON, OFF*
p. 7-39
10. FIX. UNIT OFFSET
SPEED PRIORITY1, SPEED PRIORITY2,
OFF*
p. 7-40
11. AUTO ADF DRTY ADJ** ON*, OFF
12. MAINTENANCE CODE
p. 7-41
This setting is not functional in this model.
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
5-12
Additional Functions Settings Table
-
■ REPORT SETTINGS
Additional Functions
Settings
Applicable
Page
TX REPORT: PRINT ERROR ONLY*,
OUTPUT YES, OUTPUT NO
1. SETTINGS**
RX REPORT: PRINT ERROR ONLY,
OUTPUT YES, OUTPUT NO*
*2
ACTIVITY REPORT:
AUTO PRINT: OUTPUT YES*,
OUTPUT NO
TX/RX SEPARATE: ON, OFF*
ACTIVITY REPORT**
ADD BOOK DETAILS**:
1-TOUCH (DETAILS),
CODED (DETAILS)
p. 5-47
5
Customizing Settings
2. LIST PRINT
SPEED DIAL LIST**: 1-TOUCH LIST,
CODED DIAL LIST,
GROUP DIAL LIST
USER DATA LIST
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
*2: See the Facsimile Guide.
■ SYSTEM SETTINGS
Settings
Applicable
Page
1. SYS. MANAGER INFO
SYS. MANAGER ID, SYSTEM PASSWORD,
SYSTEM MANAGER
p. 6-2
2. DEVICE INFO
DEVICE NAME, LOCATION
p. 6-34
3. MANAGE DEPT. ID
ON, OFF*:
REGISTER DEPT. ID:
PASSWORD, PAGE LIMIT SET.,
ERASE
PAGE TOTALS:
VIEW PAGE TOTALS, CLEAR ALL
TOTAL, PRINT LIST
PDL JOBS W/OUT ID: ON*, OFF
p. 6-7
4. MANAGE USER ID
ON, OFF*
p. 6-24
Additional Functions
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Additional Functions Settings Table
5-13
■ SYSTEM SETTINGS Table Continued
Additional Functions
Settings
Applicable
Page
TCP/IP SETTINGS
SNMP SETTINGS
DEDICATED PORT
5. NETWORK SETTINGS**
ETHERNET DRIVER
VIEW IP ADDRESS
STRTUP TIME SET.
*6
TX START SPEED: 2400 bps, 4800 bps,
7200 bps, 9600 bps, 14400 bps, 33600 bps*
6. COMMUNICATIONS**
RX START SPEED: 2400 bps, 4800 bps,
7200 bps, 9600 bps, 14400 bps, 33600 bps*
*2
5
7. REMOTE UI
Customizing Settings
MEMORY LOCK: ON, OFF*
PASSWORD, REPORT PRINT,
MEMORY RX TIME
8. ACCESS TO DEST.**
ON*, OFF
RESTRICT NEW ADD.: ON, OFF*
FAX DRIVER TX: ON*, OFF
p. 6-26, *7
p. 6-28, *2
9. CHECKING THE LOG**
ON*, OFF
p. 6-30
10. USE DEVICE USB
ON*, OFF
p. 6-32
An asterisk (*) indicates the default settings.
Two asterisks (**) indicate items that appear only when the appropriate optional
equipment is attached.
*2: See the Facsimile Guide.
*6: See the Network Guide.
*7: See the Remote UI Guide.
5-14
Additional Functions Settings Table
Specifying Common Settings
You can specify the settings that are common to the Copy, Fax, and Printer
functions.
NOTE
The Common Settings menu is made up of several items. Press [
scroll to the items you want to set.
] or [
] to
Initial Function at Power ON
You can specify the screen that is displayed when you turn ON the main power, or
after the Auto Clear mode initiates.
5
Additional
Functions
1
Customizing Settings
NOTE
The default setting is 'COPY'.
Press [Additional Functions].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
The Additional Functions menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <COMMON SETTINGS> appears
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
COMMON SETTINGS
1.DEFAULT SETTINGS
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
Specifying Common Settings
5-15
3
] until <DEFAULT SETTINGS> appears ➞
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
COMMON SETTINGS
1.DEFAULT SETTINGS
OK
DEFAULT SETTINGS
COPY
The <DEFAULT SETTINGS> menu appears.
4
] to select <FAX> or <COPY> ➞
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
<FAX> appears only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
OK
Select <FAX> to set the machine to the Fax function when the power is
turned ON.
Select <COPY> to set the machine to the Copy function when the power is
turned ON.
Customizing Settings
5
DEFAULT SETTINGS
COPY
COMMON SETTINGS
2.AUTO CLEAR SET.
The default mode is set.
Stop
5-16
5
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Specifying Common Settings
Default Display after Auto Clear
You can set whether the screen specified as the Initial Function is displayed after
the Auto Clear mode initiates.
NOTE
• The time necessary for Auto Clear to initiate can be set. (See "Auto Clear Time," on p.
5-42.)
• The default setting is 'INITIAL FUNCTION'.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<COMMON SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Initial Function at Power
ON," on p. 5-15.
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
5
] until <AUTO CLEAR SET.> appears ➞
COMMON SETTINGS
2.AUTO CLEAR SET.
AUTO CLEAR SET.
INITIAL FUNCTION
The <AUTO CLEAR SET.> menu appears.
Specifying Common Settings
5-17
Customizing Settings
OK
3
Press [
] or [
] to select <INITIAL FUNCTION> or
<SELECTED FUNCTION> ➞ press [OK].
AUTO CLEAR SET.
SELECTED FUNCTION
OK
COMMON SETTINGS
3.AUDIBLE TONES
Details of each item are shown below.
<INITIAL FUNCTION>:
<SELECTED FUNCTION>: The display returns to the main menu of the function
that was displayed before the Auto Clear mode
activated. For example, if you set the Copy function
as the initial function, and Auto Clear initiates while a
settings screen for the Fax function is shown, the
display returns to the initial Fax menu.
5
Customizing Settings
The function specified as the initial function is
displayed after the Auto Clear mode initiates. For
example, if you set the Fax function as the initial
function, and Auto Clear initiates while a settings
screen for the Copy function is shown, the display
returns to the initial Fax menu.
The Auto Clear Settings is set.
Stop
5-18
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Specifying Common Settings
Tone Settings
You can set whether to sound audible tones. The following tones sound at the
following times:
• Entry
Tone:
When pressing keys on the control panel
• Error
Tone:
When a malfunction occurs (e.g., paper jam or
operational error)
• TX
(Transmission) Job Done Tone: When a fax transmission completes
successfully
• RX
(Reception) Job Done Tone:
When a fax reception completes successfully
Done Tone:
When scanning is complete
• Print
Done Tone:
When printing is complete
NOTE
• The default setting is 'ON' for the Entry Tone and Error Tone, and 'ERROR ONLY' for the
TX Job Done, RX Job Done, Scan Done, and Print Done Tones. The tone volume is set
to '1' for every tone.
• The maximum tone volume is '3'.
• The volume can be set only when the Fax function is available.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<COMMON SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Initial Function at Power
ON," on p. 5-15.
OK
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <AUDIBLE TONES> appears ➞
COMMON SETTINGS
3.AUDIBLE TONES
AUDIBLE TONES
1.ENTRY TONE
The <AUDIBLE TONE> menu appears.
Specifying Common Settings
5-19
5
Customizing Settings
• Scan
3
OK
Press [
] or [
] to select <ENTRY TONE>, <ERROR
TONE>, <TX JOB DONE TONE>, <RX JOB DONE TONE>,
<SCAN DONE TONE>, or <PRINT DONE TONE> ➞ press [OK].
AUDIBLE TONES
1.ENTRY TONE
4
ENTRY TONE
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON>, <ERROR ONLY>, or
<OFF> for the tone you are setting ➞ press [OK].
If you selected <OFF>, proceed to step 6.
OK
ENTRY TONE
5
Customizing Settings
5
ON
ENTRY TONE
Repeat steps 3 to 5 to set the volume for other tones.
ENTRY TONE
1
AUDIBLE TONES
2.ERROR TONE
The selected tone is set.
5-20
6
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Specifying Common Settings
1
] to select the volume for each tone ➞
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
You can select from 1 to 3.
OK
Stop
ON
Setting the Toner Saver Mode
You can set the level of toner consumption for printing.
NOTE
The default setting is 'OFF'.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<COMMON SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Initial Function at Power
ON," on p. 5-15.
OK
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <TONER SAVER MODE> appears
COMMON SETTINGS
4.TONER SAVER MODE
OK
TONER SAVER MODE
OFF
The <TONER SAVER MODE> menu appears.
3
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] to select <LOW>, <HIGH>, or <OFF> ➞
TONER SAVER MODE
OK
LOW
COMMON SETTINGS
5.PRINTER DENSITY
The Toner Saver Mode is set.
NOTE
If the Toner Saver mode is set to ‘HIGH’, print quality may be affected. If you notice
a degradation in print quality, set this mode to ‘OFF’.
Stop
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Specifying Common Settings
5-21
5
Customizing Settings
2
Adjusting the Print Density
You can adjust the density scale if differences between the image on the original
and the print occur.
NOTE
The default setting is in the middle '5', on a scale of 1 to 9.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<COMMON SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Initial Function at Power
ON," on p. 5-15.
OK
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
Customizing Settings
5
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <PRINTER DENSITY> appears ➞
COMMON SETTINGS
5.PRINTER DENSITY
OK
PRINTER DENSITY
-LT
DK+
The <PRINTER DENSITY> menu appears.
3
Press [
] or [
] to adjust the density from light (-LT) to
dark (DK+) ➞ press [OK].
PRINTER DENSITY
-LT
DK+
OK
COMMON SETTINGS
6.AUTO DRAWER SELCT
The Printer Density is adjusted.
Stop
5-22
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Specifying Common Settings
Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching
You can set which paper sources can be used for Automatic Paper Selection and
Automatic Drawer Switching. This setting can be made independently for all
functions of the machine (Copy, Print, and Fax), and is especially useful when you
want to use different paper sources for different purposes.
NOTE
• Paper sources set to 'ON' are used for the following functions:
- APS (Auto Paper Selection): The machine automatically selects the appropriate paper
size (paper source) based on the original’s size and copy ratio settings (when making a
copy), or the set ratio of the image (when receiving a fax).
- ADS (Auto Drawer Switching): If a paper source runs out of paper during a continuous
print job, the machine automatically selects another paper source with the same paper
size, and begins feeding paper from that paper source.
• The default settings are 'OFF' for the stack bypass, and 'ON' for the other paper sources.
1
5
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<COMMON SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Initial Function at Power
ON," on p. 5-15.
OK
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
] until <AUTO DRAWER SELCT>
appears ➞ press [OK].
COMMON SETTINGS
6.AUTO DRAWER SELCT
AUTO DRAWER SELCT
1.COPY
The <AUTO DRAWER SELCT> menu appears.
Specifying Common Settings
5-23
Customizing Settings
Additional
Functions
3
Press [
] or [
] to select <COPY>, <PRINTER>, <FAX>,
or <OTHER> ➞ press [OK].
<FAX> appears only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
OK
AUTO DRAWER SELCT
1.COPY
COPY
1.DRAWER 1
NOTE
<OTHER> is used for specifying the paper source for printing reports.
4
COPY
5.STACK BYPASS
OK
5
5
Customizing Settings
Press [
] or [
] until <STACK BYPASS> or the desired
paper source appears ➞ press [OK].
Press [
] or [
STACK BYPASS
OFF
] to select <ON> or <OFF> ➞ press [OK].
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to make settings for the other paper sources.
OK
STACK BYPASS
OFF
AUTO DRAWER SELCT
2.PRINTER
Details of each item are shown below.
<ON>: The paper source is eligible for APS/ADS.
<OFF>: The paper source is ineligible for APS/ADS.
The APS/ADS is set.
NOTE
Regardless of the stack bypass setting, you cannot select 'OFF' for all of the paper
sources at the same time. At least one of the paper sources, besides the stack
bypass must be set to 'ON'.
Stop
5-24
6
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Specifying Common Settings
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source
This setting enables you to specify the paper type loaded in each paper drawer.
IMPORTANT
• <DRAWER 2> appears only if the optional Cassette Feeding Module-J1 is attached to
the imageRUNNER 2016. <DRAWER 3> and <DRAWER 4> appear only if the optional
Cassette Feeding Module-K1 is attached.
• Be sure to correctly set the paper type. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could
adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and
require a service repair, or the paper could jam.
NOTE
The default setting is 'PLAIN PAPER'.
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<COMMON SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
5
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Initial Function at Power
ON," on p. 5-15.
OK
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <SELECT PAPER TYPE> appears
COMMON SETTINGS
7.SELECT PAPER TYPE
OK
SELECT PAPER TYPE
1.DRAWER 1
The <SELECT PAPER TYPE> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
] until the paper drawer in which you
want to register the paper type appears ➞ press [OK].
SELECT PAPER TYPE
1.DRAWER 1
DRAWER 1
PLAIN PAPER
OK
Specifying Common Settings
5-25
Customizing Settings
Additional
Functions
4
Press [
] or [
] to select <PLAIN PAPER>, <COLOR>,
<RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>, <BOND>, or <3HOLE
PUNCH PAPER> ➞ press [OK].
Make sure that the registered paper type setting is the same paper type that is
loaded in the paper drawer.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set the paper type for the other drawers.
DRAWER 1
PLAIN PAPER
SELECT PAPER TYPE
2.DRAWER 2
The paper type is set for the paper drawer.
NOTE
For more information on paper types, see "Available Paper Stock," on p. 2-24.
Stop
Customizing Settings
5
5
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode
You can set the amount of energy that the machine consumes when it is in the
Sleep mode.
NOTE
• If you set the energy consumption level to 'LOW', the machine consumes less energy in
the Sleep mode than when it is set to 'HIGH'; However, it takes more time for the machine
to recover from the Sleep mode.
• The default setting is 'LOW'.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<COMMON SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Initial Function at Power
ON," on p. 5-15.
OK
5-26
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
Specifying Common Settings
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <ENERGY IN SLEEP> appears ➞
COMMON SETTINGS
8.ENERGY IN SLEEP
OK
ENERGY IN SLEEP
LOW
The <ENERGY IN SLEEP> menu appears.
3
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
ENERGY IN SLEEP
OK
] to select <HIGH> or <LOW> ➞
LOW
COMMON SETTINGS
9.TRAY DESIGNATION
Details of each item are shown below.
<HIGH>: Energy consumption in the Sleep mode is high, but it takes shorter to
recover from the Sleep mode.
The level of the energy consumption is set.
Stop
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Specifying Common Settings
5-27
5
Customizing Settings
<LOW>: Energy consumption in the Sleep mode is low, but it takes longer to
recover from the Sleep mode.
Output Tray Designation
You can designate the machine’s output trays to be used for specific functions. The
output trays are indicated by Tray A and Tray B.
Options Attached
Finisher-U1 and
Additional Finisher Tray-C1
Default Settings
Tray A: PRINTER, FAX, and
OTHER
Tray A and B
A
B
Tray B: COPY
5
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1
Tray A: PRINTER, FAX, and
OTHER
A
B
Customizing Settings
Tray B: COPY
IMPORTANT
The Tray Designation mode is available only if the optional Finisher-U1 and Additional
Finisher Tray-C1 or Inner 2 Way Tray-E1 are attached to the machine.
NOTE
• If heavyweight paper or transparencies are loaded in the stack bypass, they will be output
to Tray B regardless of the Tray Designation settings. Plain paper, however, can be output
to either Tray A or B.
• If you set both trays to 'ON' for a single function, Tray B has the priority.
• The same output tray can be designated for multiple functions.
• The default setting is 'ON' for all functions.
5-28
Specifying Common Settings
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<COMMON SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Initial Function at Power
ON," on p. 5-15.
OK
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <TRAY DESIGNATION> appears ➞
COMMON SETTINGS
9.TRAY DESIGNATION
OK
TRAY DESIGNATION
1.TRAY A
The <TRAY DESIGNATION> menu appears.
TRAY DESIGNATION
1.TRAY A
OK
4
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
5
] to select <TRAY A> or <TRAY B> ➞
Customizing Settings
3
TRAY A
1.COPY
Press [
] or [
] to select the functions for which to
designate output trays A and B ➞ press [OK].
You can select <COPY>, <FAX>, <PRINTER>, or <OTHER>.
<FAX> appears only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
TRAY A
1.COPY
COPY
ON
NOTE
<OTHER> is used for specifying report printing settings.
Specifying Common Settings
5-29
5
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> or <OFF> ➞ press [OK].
If you want to use an output tray for only one function, select <ON> only for that
function.
OK
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set Tray Designation settings for the other functions.
COPY
ON
TRAY A
2.PRINTER
The Tray Designation setting is set.
IMPORTANT
If a certain tray reaches its stacking limit, the machine automatically uses another
tray that is designated for the same function. However, it is recommended that you
only designate one tray for fax documents to prevent them from getting lost.
Stop
6
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Customizing Settings
5
Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass
You can set the paper size and type that the stack bypass uses beforehand. This
setting is useful if you always load the same paper size and type into the stack
bypass.
IMPORTANT
• When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies,
be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If
the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image.
Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper
could jam.
• If you set the standard paper size and type for the stack bypass, the paper size/type is
fixed, and you cannot select a different paper size/type for the stack bypass.
NOTE
• If you are using the stack bypass as a paper source for the Copy and Fax functions, you
must select the stack bypass when specifying the Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS setting.
(See "Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching," on p. 5-23.)
• The default setting is 'OFF'.
5-30
Specifying Common Settings
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<COMMON SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Initial Function at Power
ON," on p. 5-15.
OK
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <BYPASS STD SET> appears ➞
COMMON SETTINGS
10.BYPASS STD SET
OK
BYPASS STD SET
OFF
The <BYPASS STD SET> menu appears.
Press [
] or [
5
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Settings
3
If you select <OFF>, proceed to step 8.
OK
BYPASS STD SET
4
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
ON
] until <PAPER SIZE> appears ➞
BYPASS STD SET
1.PAPER SIZE
OK
5
BYPASS STD SET
1.PAPER SIZE
SELECT PAPER SIZE
LTR
Select the desired paper size.
● If you want to select a standard paper size or envelope type:
❑ Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
OK
] until the desired paper size or envelope type appears
SELECT PAPER SIZE
LTR
BYPASS STD SET
2.SELECT PAPER TYPE
NOTE
If you select COM10, MONARCH, DL, ISO-C5, or ISO-B5 for the envelope type,
<ENVELOPE> is automatically selected, and the screen for selecting the paper
type will not appear.
Specifying Common Settings
5-31
● If you want to select a nonstandard paper size:
❑ Press [
❑ Press [
ABC
PQRS
] until <VERTICAL SIZE> appears ➞ press [OK].
TUV
❑ Enter the vertical size of the paper using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
The vertical size can be set from 3 3/4" to 11 3/4" (95 mm to 297 mm).
9
VERTICAL SIZE
SYMBOLS
Tone
#
0
95MM
OK
Customizing Settings
5
❑ Press [
ABC
4
3
6
5
Tone
] until <HORIZONTAL SIZE> appears ➞ press [OK].
HORIZONTAL SIZE
148MM
The horizontal size can be set from 5 7/8" to 17" (148 mm to 432 mm).
MNO
TUV
7
FREE BYPASS SIZE
2.HORIZONTAL SIZE
❑ Enter the horizontal size of the paper using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
DEF
2
JKL
PQRS
] or [
FREE BYPASS SIZE
2.HORIZONTAL SIZE
OK
1
WXYZ
8
9
HORIZONTAL SIZE
SYMBOLS
0
#
148MM
OK
6
7
OK
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
BYPASS STD SET
2.SELECT PAPER TYPE
] until <SELECT PAPER TYPE> appears
BYPASS STD SET
2.SELECT PAPER TYPE
OK
SELECT PAPER TYPE
PLAIN PAPER
] to select the desired paper type ➞
SELECT PAPER TYPE
PLAIN PAPER
COMMON SETTINGS
11.PAPER FEED SWITCH
The standard size and type for the stack bypass is set.
5-32
95MM
WXYZ
8
7
GHI
VERTICAL SIZE
3
MNO
5
FREE BYPASS SIZE
1.VERTICAL SIZE
6
DEF
2
JKL
4
] or [
FREE BYPASS SIZE
1.VERTICAL SIZE
OK
1
] until <FREESIZE> appears ➞ press [OK].
SELECT PAPER SIZE
FREESIZE
OK
GHI
] or [
Specifying Common Settings
NOTE
• <TRANSPARENCY> can be selected only if <LTR> is selected as the paper size.
• If you select <TRANSPARENCY> or <LABELS>, Staple in the finisher mode is
ignored.
• For more information on paper types, see "Available Paper Stock," on p. 2-24.
Stop
8
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority
You can set whether the printing speed is the priority for your job, or whether to print
on a specific side of the paper. This is useful when you want to make one- or
two-sided prints on preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already
printed on it) without changing the orientation of the paper loaded in paper source.
NOTE
The default setting for all paper sources is 'SPEED PRIORITY'.
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<COMMON SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Initial Function at Power
ON," on p. 5-15.
OK
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <PAPER FEED SWITCH> appears
COMMON SETTINGS
11.PAPER FEED SWITCH
PAPER FEED SWITCH
1.STACK BYPASS
The <PAPER FEED SWITCH> menu appears.
Specifying Common Settings
5-33
Customizing Settings
Additional
Functions
5
3
Press [
] or [
] until <STACK BYPASS> or the desired
paper source appears ➞ press [OK].
<DRAWER 2> appears only if the optional Cassette Feeding Module-J1 is
attached to the imageRUNNER 2016.
OK
<DRAWER 3> and <DRAWER 4> appear only if the optional Cassette Feeding
Module-K1 is attached.
PAPER FEED SWITCH
1.STACK BYPASS
4
OK
5
STACK BYPASS
SPEED PRIORITY
Press [
] or [
] to select <SPEED PRIORITY> or
<PRINT SIDE> ➞ press [OK].
STACK BYPASS
SPEED PRIORITY
PAPER FEED SWITCH
2.DRAWER 1
Details of each item are shown below.
Customizing Settings
<SPEED PRIORITY>:
When you feed one- or two-sided prints into the machine, the method for
delivering paper inside the machine changes, and this affects the printing
speed. Therefore, to maximize the printing speed, load the paper manually as
follows:
One-Sided Print:
Load the paper face up in a paper drawer, or face down
into the stack bypass. The side facing up in the paper
drawer, and the side facing down in the stack bypass,
are the sides printed on.
Two-Sided Print:
Load the paper face down in a paper drawer, or face up
into the stack bypass. The side facing down in the
paper drawer, and the side facing up in the stack
bypass, are the first sides that are printed on.
<PRINT SIDE>:
If you load paper into the paper drawer and select <PRINT SIDE>, no matter
whether you are printing one- or two-sided prints, the side of the paper facing
down is always the one printed on first. (The side facing up is the one printed on
first for the stack bypass.) However, some speed will be sacrificed printing
one-sided prints.
If <PRINT SIDE> is selected for a paper source, and <AUTO DRAWER SELCT>
in COMMON SETTINGS (from the Additional Functions menu) is set to 'ON', the
Auto Paper Selection and Auto Drawer Switching Settings are ignored. Also, the
machine’s printing speed may become slower when you print one-sided
documents.
The paper feed method is set.
5-34
Specifying Common Settings
Stop
5
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Changing the Language Shown on the LCD Display
You can select the language displayed on the LCD display.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<COMMON SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Initial Function at Power
ON," on p. 5-15.
OK
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <DISPLAY LANGUAGE> appears
COMMON SETTINGS
12.DISPLAY LANGUAGE
OK
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
The <DISPLAY LANGUAGE> menu appears.
3
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] to select the desired language ➞
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
OK
COMMON SETTINGS
13.ADF DIRTY ERROR
The LCD display language changes to the selected language.
IMPORTANT
Some messages may not be displayed properly in the language that you just
selected. In this case, restart the machine (turn the machine OFF, and then back
ON.)
Stop
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Specifying Common Settings
5
Customizing Settings
2
5-35
Displaying a Feeder Error Message Prompt
You can use the Feeder Error Message mode to prompt you to clean the scanning
area when the machine detects streaks or stains. If the feeder is not clean, the
machine will scan and print dust and grime on the output.
IMPORTANT
The ADF DIRTY ERROR mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-P1) is
attached to the machine.
NOTE
The default setting is 'DISPLAY'.
Additional
Functions
1
5
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<COMMON SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Settings
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Initial Function at Power
ON," on p. 5-15.
OK
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <ADF DIRTY ERROR> appears ➞
COMMON SETTINGS
13.ADF DIRTY ERROR
OK
ADF DIRTY ERROR
DISPLAY
The <ADF DIRTY ERROR> menu appears.
3
Press [
] or [
] to select <DISPLAY> or <DO NOT
DISPLAY> ➞ press [OK].
If you select <DISPLAY>, the screen prompting you to clean the scanning area
appears when the machine detects streaks or stains.
OK
ADF DIRTY ERROR
DISPLAY
COMMON SETTINGS
14.INIT. COMMON SET.
The selected mode is set.
Stop
5-36
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Specifying Common Settings
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults
You can restore all of the Common Settings to their default (initial settings).
NOTE
If the Display Language mode is set, and then the Common Settings are returned to their
default settings, the language shown on the LCD display remains unchanged. (See
"Changing the Language Shown on the LCD Display," on p. 5-35.)
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<COMMON SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Initial Function at Power
ON," on p. 5-15.
OK
The <COMMON SETTINGS> menu appears.
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <INIT. COMMON SET.> appears ➞
COMMON SETTINGS
14.INIT. COMMON SET.
OK
INIT. COMMON SET.
OFF
The <INIT. COMMON SET.> menu appears.
3
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
To cancel initializing the Common Settings, select <OFF>.
OK
INIT. COMMON SET.
ON
ADD. FUNCTIONS
2.COPY SETTINGS
The Common Settings are returned to their defaults.
Stop
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Specifying Common Settings
5-37
5
Customizing Settings
2
Timer Settings
You can set the current date and time, and specify the time it takes for the machine
to enter into the Sleep mode.
NOTE
The Timer Settings menu is made up of several items. Press [
to the items you want to set.
] or [
] to scroll
Current Date and Time
Setting the current date and time is very important. The current date and time
settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them.
Customizing Settings
5
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
The Additional Functions menu appears.
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <TIMER SETTINGS> appears ➞
ADD. FUNCTIONS
6.TIMER SETTINGS
OK
TIMER SETTINGS
1.DATE&TIME SETTING
The <TIMER SETTINGS> menu appears.
3
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <DATE&TIME SETTING> appears
TIMER SETTINGS
1.DATE&TIME SETTING
OK
DATE&TIME SETTING
00/00/'00 00:00
The <DATE&TIME SETTING> menu appears.
5-38
Timer Settings
ABC
DEF
2
1
JKL
4
PQRS
3
4
MNO
6
5
TUV
Enter the current date (month, day, year) and time using the
numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
WXYZ
8
7
9
Enter all digits (including zero) for the date and time.
SYMBOLS
Tone
0
#
Enter the last two digits of the year, and the time in 24-hour notation, as four digits
(including zeros) without a space.
OK
Examples: August 3
2005
➞ 0803
➞ 05
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318
DATE&TIME SETTING
08/03/'05 10:50
TIMER SETTINGS
2.DATE TYPE SELECT
The date and time are set.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering values, press [
] or [
the cursor under the incorrect value ➞ enter the correct value.
Stop
5
] to position
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Timer Settings
5
Customizing Settings
GHI
5-39
Setting the Date Format
You can set the date format that is used on the LCD display.
NOTE
The default setting is 'MM/DD/YYYY' (month/day/year).
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] or [
] until <TIMER
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Current Date and Time," on
p. 5-38.
OK
The <TIMER SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
Customizing Settings
5
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <DATE TYPE SELECT> appears ➞
TIMER SETTINGS
2.DATE TYPE SELECT
OK
DATE TYPE SELECT
MM/DD/YYYY
The <DATE TYPE SELECT> menu appears.
3
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] to select the desired date format ➞
Examples: MM/DD/YYYY ➞ 08/03/2005
OK
DD/MM YYYY ➞ 03/08 2005
YYYY MM/DD ➞ 2005 08/03
DATE TYPE SELECT
MM/DD/YYYY
TIMER SETTINGS
3.AUTO SLEEP TIME
The date format is set.
Stop
5-40
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Timer Settings
Auto Sleep Time
If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time (after the last print job or a
key operation is performed), it enters the Sleep mode. You can specify the time it
takes for the machine to enter the Sleep mode (from 3 to 30 minutes). You can also
set Auto Sleep Time to 'OFF'.
NOTE
• The default settings are 'ON' and '5 MIN.'.
• To enter the Sleep mode manually, press the control panel power switch.
• The machine will not enter the Sleep mode when:
- the machine is in operation.
- all paper cassettes are empty.
- there is a paper jam.
- the toner cartridge is empty.
• The machine will recover from the Sleep mode when:
- you press the control panel power switch.
- printing reports.
- a fax is received.
- the Delayed Transmission mode initiates.
- a print job is sent from a computer.
- a print job is sent via the network.
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] or [
] until <TIMER
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Current Date and Time," on
p. 5-38.
OK
The <TIMER SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <AUTO SLEEP TIME> appears ➞
TIMER SETTINGS
3.AUTO SLEEP TIME
AUTO SLEEP TIME
ON
The <AUTO SLEEP TIME> menu appears.
Timer Settings
5-41
Customizing Settings
Additional
Functions
5
3
Press [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
] or [
If you select <OFF> ➞ proceed to step 5.
OK
AUTO SLEEP TIME
4
ON
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
ENERGY SVR TIME
5MIN.
] to select the desired Auto Sleep Time
You can also enter values using the numeric keys.
OK
The Auto Sleep Time can be set from 3 to 30 minutes in one minute increments.
ENERGY SVR TIME
5MIN.
TIMER SETTINGS
4.AUTO CLEAR TIME
The Auto Sleep Time is set.
Customizing Settings
5
Stop
5
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Auto Clear Time
If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time (after the last print job or a
key operation is performed), the display returns to the Standby display or the
screen of the selected function.
The Auto Clear Time mode can be set from 1 to 9 minutes in one-minute
increments, and can also be set to 'OFF'.
NOTE
The default settings are 'ON' and '2 MIN.'.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] or [
] until <TIMER
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Current Date and Time," on
p. 5-38.
OK
5-42
The <TIMER SETTINGS> menu appears.
Timer Settings
2
] until <AUTO CLEAR TIME> appears ➞
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
TIMER SETTINGS
4.AUTO CLEAR TIME
OK
AUTO CLEAR TIME
ON
The <AUTO CLEAR TIME> menu appears.
3
Press [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
] or [
If you select <OFF> ➞ proceed to step 5.
AUTO CLEAR TIME
4
ON
AUTO CLEAR TIME
2MIN.
] to select the desired time period ➞
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
5
You can also enter values using the numeric keys.
OK
The Auto Clear Time can be set from 1 to 9 minutes in one minute increments.
AUTO CLEAR TIME
2MIN.
TIMER SETTINGS
5.DAYLIGHT SV.TIME
The Auto Clear Time is set.
Stop
5
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Timer Settings
5-43
Customizing Settings
OK
Daylight Saving Time
In some countries, time is advanced throughout the summer season. The period in
which this is applied is called "Daylight Saving Time." Follow the procedure below
to set Daylight Saving Time.
NOTE
The default setting is 'OFF'.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] or [
] until <TIMER
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Current Date and Time," on
p. 5-38.
OK
5
The <TIMER SETTINGS> menu appears.
Customizing Settings
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <DAYLIGHT SV. TIME> appears ➞
TIMER SETTINGS
5.DAYLIGHT SV.TIME
OK
DAYLIGHT SV.TIME
OFF
The <DAYLIGHT SV. TIME> menu appears.
3
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If you select <OFF> ➞ proceed to step 12.
OK
DAYLIGHT SV.TIME
4
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
Timer Settings
DAYLIGHT SV.TIME
1.START DATE/TIME
] until <START DATE/TIME> appears ➞
DAYLIGHT SV.TIME
1.START DATE/TIME
OK
5-44
ON
START DATE/TIME
1.MONTH
5
Press [
] or [
] until <MONTH> appears➞ press [OK].
START DATE/TIME
1.MONTH
OK
6
MONTH
] until the desired month appears ➞
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
MONTH
OK
APRIL
APRIL
START DATE/TIME
2.WEEK
The <START DATE/TIME> menu appears.
Press [
] until <WEEK> appears ➞ press [OK].
] or [
START DATE/TIME
2.WEEK
OK
8
OK
WEEK
5
FIRST WEEK
Press [
] or [
] to select <FIRST WEEK>, <SECOND
WEEK>, <THIRD WEEK>, <FOURTH WEEK>, or <LAST
WEEK> ➞ press [OK].
WEEK
FIRST WEEK
START DATE/TIME
3.DAY
The <START DATE/TIME> menu appears.
9
] until <DAY> appears ➞ press [OK].
] or [
START DATE/TIME
3.DAY
OK
10
OK
Press [
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
DAY
DAY
SUNDAY
] to select the day of the week ➞
SUNDAY
DAYLIGHT SV.TIME
2.END DATE/TIME
The <DAYLIGHT SV. TIME> menu appears.
Timer Settings
5-45
Customizing Settings
7
OK
11
Press [OK] to select <END DATE/TIME> ➞ follow steps 5 to 10
to set the end date and time for Daylight Saving Time.
DAYLIGHT SV.TIME
2.END DATE/TIME
END DATE/TIME
1.MONTH
The Daylight Saving Time is set.
Stop
12
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Customizing Settings
5
5-46
Timer Settings
Printing Reports
You can print lists of registered telephone numbers and transmission settings, as
well as reports about document transactions.
Activity Report
The Activity Report prints a list of the past 40 fax transactions. If you want to view a
sample Activity Report, see "Activity Report," on p. 9-3.
1
Press [Additional Functions].
5
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
The Additional Functions menu appears.
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <REPORT SETTINGS> appears ➞
ADD. FUNCTIONS
8.REPORT SETTINGS
OK
REPORT SETTINGS
1.SETTINGS
The <REPORT SETTINGS> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <LIST PRINT> appears ➞
REPORT SETTINGS
2.LIST PRINT
LIST PRINT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
The <LIST PRINT> menu appears.
Printing Reports
5-47
Customizing Settings
Additional
Functions
4
Press [
[OK].
] or [
] to select <ACTIVITY REPORT> ➞ press
LIST PRINT
1.ACTIVITY REPORT
OK
100% AUTO
A TEXT
O1
Printing starts, and the screen returns to the Standby display.
Speed Dialing Lists
Follow the procedure below to print a standard One-Touch Speed Dialing List,
Coded Speed Dialing List, or Group Speed Dialing List. If you want to view samples
of these lists, see "Report Samples," on p. 9-2.
Additional
Functions
Customizing Settings
5
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<REPORT SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Activity Report," on p.
5-47.
OK
The <REPORT SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <LIST PRINT> appears ➞
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 3 of "Activity Report," on p. 5-47.
OK
The <LIST PRINT> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <SPEED DIAL LIST> appears ➞
LIST PRINT
2.SPEED DIAL LIST
The <SPEED DIAL LIST> menu appears.
5-48
Printing Reports
SPEED DIAL LIST
1.1-TOUCH LIST
4
Press [
] or [
] to select the speed dialing list that you
want to print ➞ press [OK].
SPEED DIAL LIST
1.1-TOUCH LIST
OK
100% AUTO
A TEXT
O1
Details of each item are shown below.
<1-TOUCH LIST>:
Prints the standard list of all one-touch speed dialing keys
and numbers registered in the machine.
<CODED DIAL LIST>: Prints the standard list of all coded speed dialing codes
and numbers registered in the machine.
<GROUP DIAL LIST>: Prints a list of one-touch speed dialing keys and coded
speed dialing codes and numbers registered for the
group dialing.
Printing starts, and the screen returns to the Standby display.
Follow the procedure below to print detailed One-Touch and Coded Speed Dialing
lists. If you want to view samples of these lists, see "Report Samples," on p. 9-2.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<REPORT SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Activity Report," on p.
5-47.
OK
The <REPORT SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <LIST PRINT> appears ➞
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 3 of "Activity Report," on p. 5-47.
The <LIST PRINT> menu appears.
Printing Reports
5-49
Customizing Settings
5
Speed Dialing Lists (Detailed)
3
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <ADD BOOK DETAILS> appears
LIST PRINT
3.ADD BOOK DETAILS
OK
ADD BOOK DETAILS
1.1-TOUCH(DETAILS)
The <ADD BOOK DETAILS> menu appears.
4
OK
Press [
] or [
] to select the speed dialing list that you
want to print ➞ press [OK].
ADD BOOK DETAILS
1.1-TOUCH(DETAILS)
100% AUTO
A TEXT
O1
Details of each item are shown below.
<1-TOUCH (DETAILS)>: Prints a detailed list of all one-touch speed dialing keys
and numbers registered in the machine in a stacked
format.
Customizing Settings
5
<CODED (DETAILS)>:
Prints a detailed list of all coded speed dialing codes
and numbers registered in the machine in a stacked
format.
Printing starts, and the screen returns to the Standby display.
5-50
Printing Reports
User’s Data List
Follow the procedure below to print a comprehensive list of current user data
settings. If you want to view a sample of the User’s Data List, see "User’s Data List,"
on p. 9-2.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<REPORT SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 in "Activity Report," on p.
5-47.
OK
The <REPORT SETTINGS> menu appears.
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <LIST PRINT> appears ➞
5
Customizing Settings
2
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 3 of "Activity Report," on p. 5-47.
OK
The <LIST PRINT> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] to select <USER DATA LIST> ➞
LIST PRINT
4.USER DATA LIST
100% AUTO
A TEXT
O1
Printing starts, and the screen returns to the Standby display.
Printing Reports
5-51
System Manager Settings
6
CHAPTER
This chapter describes settings that can be made by the person in charge of the machine’s
operation, such as the System Manager.
Specifying the System Manager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
System Manager ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
System Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
System Manager’s Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Specifying Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Erasing the Department ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Checking Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
Printing Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20
Clearing Page Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22
Managing User IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Remote UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Restricting Access to Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Checking the TX/RX Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Restricting the USB Interface Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Device Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6-1
Specifying the System Manager Settings
You can set an ID and a password for the System Manager. Once the System
Manager ID and System Password are set, only the System Manager can store and
change the System Settings.
IMPORTANT
Attaching the optional Card Reader-E1, erases the System Manager ID and System
Password that have been stored.
NOTE
• For instructions on entering characters, see "Entering Characters," on p. 2-8.
• The maximum number of digits that you can store for the System Manager ID and
System Password is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the
machine stores them with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
System Manager Settings
6
System Manager ID
You must set a System Manager ID in order to manage the operation of the
machine.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
The Additional Functions menu appears.
6-2
Specifying the System Manager Settings
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
OK
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.SYS. MANAGER INFO
ADD. FUNCTIONS
9.SYSTEM SETTINGS
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <SYS. MANAGER INFO> appears
SYS. MANAGER INFO
1.SYS. MANAGER ID
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.SYS. MANAGER INFO
The <SYS. MANAGER INFO> menu appears.
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <SYS. MANAGER ID> appears ➞
SYS. MANAGER ID
0000000
SYS. MANAGER INFO
1.SYS. MANAGER ID
The <SYS. MANAGER ID> menu appears.
ABC
JKL
4
PQRS
3
MNO
6
5
TUV
7
Tone
DEF
2
1
GHI
5
Enter a number (up to seven digits) using the numeric keys ➞
press [OK].
WXYZ
8
9
SYMBOLS
0
#
You cannot store a System Manager ID with only zeros as the number, such as
<0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are
ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
If you want to set the System Password continuously, press [OK] and proceed to
step 4 of "System Password," on p. 6-4.
SYS. MANAGER ID
1231234
SYS. MANAGER INFO
2.SYSTEM PASSWORD
The System Manager ID is stored.
Specifying the System Manager Settings
6-3
6
System Manager Settings
4
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering a number, press
entire number ➞ enter the correct number.
Stop
6
C
(Clear) to clear the
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
System Password
Follow the procedure below to set the System Password.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "System Manager ID," on p.
6-2.
OK
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
6
System Manager Settings
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <SYS. MANAGER INFO> appears
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "System Manager ID," on p. 6-2.
OK
The <SYSTEM MANAGER INFO> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <SYSTEM PASSWORD> appears
SYS. MANAGER INFO
2.SYSTEM PASSWORD
SYSTEM PASSWORD
0000000
The <SYSTEM PASSWORD> menu appears.
6-4
Specifying the System Manager Settings
ABC
GHI
DEF
2
1
JKL
4
PQRS
3
6
5
TUV
Enter a number (up to seven digits) using the numeric keys ➞
press [OK].
WXYZ
8
7
4
MNO
9
SYSTEM PASSWORD
1234567
SYMBOLS
Tone
0
#
OK
SYS. MANAGER INFO
3.SYSTEM MANAGER
The System Password is stored, and the screen returns to the <SYS. MANAGER
INFO> menu.
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the password, press
entire password ➞ enter the correct password.
Stop
5
C
(Clear) to clear the
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
System Manager’s Name
Follow the procedure below to set the System Manager’s name.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "System Manager ID," on p.
6-2.
OK
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <SYS. MANAGER INFO> appears
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "System Manager ID," on p. 6-2.
The <SYSTEM MANAGER INFO> menu appears.
Specifying the System Manager Settings
6-5
System Manager Settings
6
3
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] to select <SYSTEM MANAGER> ➞
SYSTEM MANAGER
SYS. MANAGER INFO
3.SYSTEM MANAGER
:A
The <SYSTEM MANAGER> menu appears.
ABC
GHI
DEF
2
1
JKL
4
PQRS
4
6
5
TUV
7
3
MNO
Enter the System Manager’s name (up to 32 characters) using
the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
WXYZ
8
9
SYSTEM MANAGER
JOHN
SYMBOLS
Tone
0
#
OK
:A
SYSTEM SETTINGS
2.DEVICE INFO
The System Manager’s Name is stored, and the screen returns to the <SYSTEM
SETTINGS> menu.
Stop
5
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
System Manager Settings
6
6-6
Specifying the System Manager Settings
Department ID Management
You can register a Department ID and password for each department, and manage
the machine by limiting its use to only those who enter the correct Department ID
and password.
Department IDs and passwords for up to 1,000 departments can be registered. Use
Department ID Management to keep track of the copy, scan, and print totals for
each department.
With Department ID Management, the following settings can be specified:
Department ID Management 'ON' or 'OFF'.
• Register
the Department ID and password.
• Set
page limits for scans, prints, and copies.
• Set
up copy, scan, print restrictions.
IMPORTANT
If the optional Card Reader-E1 is attached, Department ID Management is automatically
activated. (See "Card Reader-E1," on p. 4-16.)
NOTE
• The maximum number of digits that you can store for the Department ID and password is
seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the machine stores them
with leading zeros.
- Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
• You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages.
• The default setting is 'OFF'.
Department ID Management
6-7
6
System Manager Settings
• Turn
Specifying Department ID Management
Follow the procedure below to enable Department ID Management.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
OK
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.SYS. MANAGER INFO
ADD. FUNCTIONS
9.SYSTEM SETTINGS
6
System Manager Settings
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <MANAGE DEPT. ID> appears ➞
MANAGE DEPT. ID
SYSTEM SETTINGS
3.MANAGE DEPT. ID
OFF
The <MANAGE DEPT. ID> menu appears.
4
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to use Department ID Management, select <OFF>.
OK
MANAGE DEPT. ID
ON
MANAGE DEPT. ID
1.REGISTER DEPT. ID
The Department ID Management is set.
Stop
6-8
5
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Department ID Management
Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit
You can register the Department ID and password after setting Department ID
Management to 'ON'.
Registering the Department ID and password enables you to set copy, print, and
scan page limits.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <MANAGE DEPT. ID> appears ➞
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
The <MANAGE DEPT. ID> menu appears.
3
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 4 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
4
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <REGISTER DEPT. ID> appears ➞
MANAGE DEPT. ID
1.REGISTER DEPT. ID
5
OK
Press [
REGISTER DEPT. ID
0001:
-------
Press [
] or [
] to select the number to which the
department will be designated ➞ press [OK].
REGISTER DEPT. ID
0001:
-------
REGISTER DEPT. ID
0000000
Department ID Management
6
System Manager Settings
2
6-9
ABC
GHI
DEF
2
1
JKL
4
PQRS
3
6
5
TUV
9
SYMBOLS
Tone
Enter the Department ID using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
You cannot register a Department ID or password with only zeros as the number,
such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading
zeros are ignored.
WXYZ
8
7
6
MNO
#
0
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
OK
REGISTER DEPT. ID
1122334
REGISTER DEPT. ID
1.PASSWORD
The Department ID is stored.
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering a number, press C (Clear) to clear the
entire number ➞ enter the correct number.
• If you do not want to set a password, you can use the machine by entering only the
Department ID.
7
System Manager Settings
6
OK
REGISTER DEPT. ID
1.PASSWORD
ABC
GHI
DEF
2
1
JKL
4
PQRS
3
8
TUV
6
9
SYMBOLS
0
#
1234567
REGISTER DEPT. ID
2.PAGE LIMIT SET.
The password is stored.
OK
NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the password, press
password ➞ enter the correct password.
9
OK
6-10
0000000
Enter the password using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
PASSWORD
WXYZ
8
Tone
PASSWORD
MNO
5
7
] until <PASSWORD> appears ➞
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
(Clear) to clear the
] until <PAGE LIMIT SET.> appears ➞
REGISTER DEPT. ID
2.PAGE LIMIT SET.
Department ID Management
C
PAGE LIMIT SET.
1.TOTAL PRINT
10
Select the desired function.
● If you want to set a restriction for the total number of prints and copies:
❑ Press [
] or [
] until <TOTAL PRINT> appears ➞ press [OK].
TOTAL PRINT
1.RESTRICT TOTAL
PAGE LIMIT SET.
1.TOTAL PRINT
OK
❑ Press [
] or [
] until <RESTRICT TOTAL> appears ➞ press [OK].
RESTRICT TOTAL
TOTAL PRINT
1.RESTRICT TOTAL
OK
❑ Press [
] or [
OFF
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to set a total page limit, select <OFF>.
❑ Press [
] or [
ON
6
] until <PAGE TOTALS> appears ➞ press [OK].
PAGE TOTALS
TOTAL PRINT
2.PAGE TOTALS
OK
TOTAL PRINT
2.PAGE TOTALS
000000
NOTE
<TOTAL PRINT> is the sum of <COPY LIMIT> and <PRINT LIMIT>.
ABC
JKL
4
PQRS
3
MNO
6
5
TUV
7
Tone
DEF
2
1
GHI
❑ Enter the maximum number of copies and prints that can be made by the
registered Department ID using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
WXYZ
8
9
SYMBOLS
0
#
PAGE TOTALS
OK
001000
PAGE LIMIT SET.
2.COPY
The Total Print is set.
Department ID Management
6-11
System Manager Settings
RESTRICT TOTAL
OK
● If you want to set a page limit restriction for copying:
❑ Press [
] or [
] until <COPY> appears ➞ press [OK].
COPY
1.RESTRICT COPY
PAGE LIMIT SET.
2.COPY
OK
❑ Press [
] or [
] until <RESTRICT COPY> appears ➞ press [OK].
RESTRICT COPY
COPY
1.RESTRICT COPY
OK
❑ Press [
] or [
OFF
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to set a page limit restriction for copies, select <OFF>.
RESTRICT COPY
OK
❑ Press [
System Manager Settings
6
ABC
DEF
2
1
JKL
4
PQRS
3
MNO
6
5
TUV
COPY
2.COPY LIMIT
] until <COPY LIMIT> appears ➞ press [OK].
COPY LIMIT
COPY
2.COPY LIMIT
OK
GHI
] or [
ON
000000
❑ Enter the maximum number of pages that can be copied by the registered
Department ID using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
WXYZ
8
7
9
SYMBOLS
Tone
0
#
COPY LIMIT
OK
005000
PAGE LIMIT SET.
3.SCAN
The Copy Limit is set.
● If you want to set a page limit restriction for scanning:
IMPORTANT
<SCAN> is displayed only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
❑ Press [
OK
6-12
] until <SCAN> appears ➞ press [OK].
PAGE LIMIT SET.
3.SCAN
❑ Press [
OK
] or [
] or [
] until <RESTRICT B&W SCAN> appears ➞ press [OK].
SCAN
1.RESTRICT B&W SCAN
Department ID Management
SCAN
1.RESTRICT B&W SCAN
RESTRICT B&W SCAN
OFF
❑ Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to set a page limit restriction for scans, select <OFF>.
RESTRICT B&W SCAN
OK
❑ Press [
ABC
DEF
2
1
JKL
4
SCAN LIMIT
6
5
TUV
000000
❑ Enter the maximum number of pages that can be scanned by the registered
Department ID using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
WXYZ
8
7
9
SYMBOLS
Tone
0
#
SCAN LIMIT
005000
OK
PAGE LIMIT SET.
4.PRINT
The Scan Limit is set.
● If you want to set a page limit restriction for printing:
❑ Press [
OK
] or [
PRINT
1.RESTRICT PRINT
] until <RESTRICT PRINT> appears ➞ press [OK].
RESTRICT PRINT
PRINT
1.RESTRICT PRINT
❑ Press [
] or [
6
] until <PRINT> appears ➞ press [OK].
PAGE LIMIT SET.
4.PRINT
❑ Press [
OK
] or [
OFF
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to set a page limit restriction for prints, select <OFF>.
OK
RESTRICT PRINT
❑ Press [
OK
] or [
ON
PRINT
2.PRINT LIMIT
] until <PRINT LIMIT> appears ➞ press [OK].
PRINT
2.PRINT LIMIT
PRINT LIMIT
000000
Department ID Management
6-13
System Manager Settings
PQRS
3
MNO
SCAN
2.SCAN LIMIT
] until <SCAN LIMIT> appears ➞ press [OK].
SCAN
2.SCAN LIMIT
OK
GHI
] or [
ON
ABC
3
JKL
4
PQRS
6
5
7
Department ID using the numeric keys ➞ press [OK].
MNO
TUV
Tone
❑ Enter the maximum number of pages that can be printed by the registered
DEF
2
1
GHI
WXYZ
8
9
PRINT LIMIT
SYMBOLS
0
#
OK
000500
REGISTER DEPT. ID
3.ERASE
The Print Limit is set.
IMPORTANT
• The machine stops sending a fax if the Scan Limit is reached while faxing a
document directly to the recipient.
• The machine stops scanning if the Scan Limit is reached while the machine is
scanning originals that are being fed from the optional feeder. (Those originals that
were scanned before the limit is reached are not added to the scan count.)
NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering a number, press C (Clear) to clear the
number ➞ enter the correct number.
• You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once a page limit is reached,
copying, scanning, or printing is not possible.
• The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print
is counted as two pages.
System Manager Settings
6
Stop
6-14
11
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Department ID Management
Erasing the Department ID and Password
You can erase the Department ID and password that you have registered.
NOTE
If Department ID Management is activated through the optional Card Reader-E1, you
cannot delete the Department ID.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <MANAGE DEPT. ID> appears ➞
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
The <MANAGE DEPT. ID> menu appears.
3
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 4 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
4
OK
Press [
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <REGISTER DEPT. ID> appears ➞
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 4 of "Registering the Department ID,
Password, and Page Limit," on p. 6-9.
The <REGISTER DEPT. ID> menu appears.
Department ID Management
6
System Manager Settings
2
6-15
5
OK
OK
Press [
] or [
] to select the Department ID you want
to erase ➞ press [OK].
REGISTER DEPT. ID
0001:
1122334
6
Press [OK].
REGISTER DEPT. ID
1122334
7
Press [
] or [
8
6
Press [
] or [
REGISTER DEPT. ID
1.PASSWORD
] until <ERASE> appears ➞ press [OK].
ERASE
REGISTER DEPT. ID
3.ERASE
OK
REGISTER DEPT. ID
1122334
OFF
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to erase the selected Department ID, select <OFF>.
System Manager Settings
OK
ERASE
ON
REGISTER DEPT. ID
0001:
-------
The selected Department ID and all of its settings are erased.
Stop
6-16
9
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Department ID Management
Checking Counter Information
You can check how many papers were used by each department.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
] until <MANAGE DEPT. ID> appears ➞
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
6
The <MANAGE DEPT. ID> menu appears.
3
Press [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
] or [
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 4 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
4
OK
Press [
[OK].
] until <PAGE TOTALS> appears ➞ press
] or [
MANAGE DEPT. ID
2.PAGE TOTALS
PAGE TOTALS
1.VIEW PAGE TOTALS
The <PAGE TOTALS> menu appears.
5
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <VIEW PAGE TOTALS> appears ➞
PAGE TOTALS
1.VIEW PAGE TOTALS
VIEW PAGE TOTALS
1.TOTAL PRINT
Department ID Management
6-17
System Manager Settings
2
6
Select the desired function.
● If you want to view the counter information for prints and copies:
❑ Press [
OK
] or [
] until <TOTAL PRINT> appears ➞ press [OK].
TOTAL PRINT
1234567
VIEW PAGE TOTALS
1.TOTAL PRINT
500
NOTE
<TOTAL PRINT> is the sum of <COPY LIMIT> and <PRINT LIMIT>.
❑ Press [
] or [
] to display the desired Department ID ➞ check the
counter information ➞ proceed to step 7.
OK
500
TOTAL PRINT
2222222
100
NOTE
Press and hold down [
] or [
] to quickly and continuously scroll
through the registered Department IDs. Continuous scrolling is useful
when a large number of Department IDs are registered.
6
System Manager Settings
TOTAL PRINT
1234567
● If you want to view the counter information for copies:
❑ Press [
OK
] or [
] until <COPY> appears ➞ press [OK].
COPY
1234567
VIEW PAGE TOTALS
2.COPY
500
❑ Press [
] or [
] to display the desired Department ID ➞ check the
counter information ➞ proceed to step 7.
OK
COPY
1234567
500
COPY
2222222
100
NOTE
Press and hold down [
] or [
] to quickly and continuously scroll
through the registered Department IDs. Continuous scrolling is useful
when a large number of Department IDs are registered.
6-18
Department ID Management
● If you want to view the counter information for fax document scans:
IMPORTANT
<SCAN> is displayed only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
❑ Press [
] or [
] until <SCAN> appears ➞ press [OK].
SCAN
1234567
VIEW PAGE TOTALS
3.SCAN
OK
500
❑ Press [
] or [
] to display the desired Department ID ➞ check the
counter information ➞ proceed to step 7.
SCAN
1234567
OK
500
SCAN
2222222
100
NOTE
Press and hold down [
] or [
] to quickly and continuously scroll
through the registered Department IDs. Continuous scrolling is useful
when a large number of Department IDs are registered.
● If you want to view the counter information for prints:
] or [
PRINT
1234567
VIEW PAGE TOTALS
4.PRINT
OK
6
] until <PRINT> appears ➞ press [OK].
500
❑ Press [
] or [
] to display the desired Department ID ➞ check the
counter information ➞ proceed to step 7.
PRINT
1234567
OK
500
PRINT
2222222
100
NOTE
Press and hold down [
] or [
] to quickly and continuously scroll
through the registered Department IDs. Continuous scrolling is useful
when a large number of Department IDs are registered.
Stop
7
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Department ID Management
6-19
System Manager Settings
❑ Press [
Printing Counter Information
You can print a list of how many papers were used by each department.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
] until <MANAGE DEPT. ID> appears ➞
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
6
System Manager Settings
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
3
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 4 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
4
Press [
[OK].
] or [
] until <PAGE TOTALS> appears ➞ press
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 4 of "Checking Counter Information," on
p. 6-17.
OK
The <PAGE TOTALS> menu appears.
5
OK
Press [
] or [
PAGE TOTALS
3.PRINT LIST
] to select <PRINT LIST> ➞ press [OK].
100% AUTO
A TEXT
O1
Printing starts, and the screen automatically returns to the Standby display.
6-20
Department ID Management
NOTE
The counter information can be printed only if 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR (plain,
recycled, or color paper) is loaded in a paper source that is set to 'ON' when you
select 'OTHER' for a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in COMMON
SETTINGS (from the Additional Function menu). (See "Auto Paper Selection/Auto
Drawer Switching," on p. 5-23.)
Clearing Page Totals
You can clear the page totals made for all departments or for specific departments.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <MANAGE DEPT. ID> appears ➞
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
The <MANAGE DEPT. ID> menu appears.
3
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 4 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
4
OK
Press [
Press [
[OK].
] or [
] until <PAGE TOTALS> appears ➞ press
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 4 of "Checking Counter Information," on
p. 6-17.
The <PAGE TOTALS> menu appears.
Department ID Management
6-21
System Manager Settings
6
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
5
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <CLEAR ALL TOTAL> appears ➞
CLEAR ALL TOTAL
PAGE TOTALS
2.CLEAR ALL TOTAL
6
Press [
] or [
OFF
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to clear the page totals, select <OFF>.
OK
CLEAR ALL TOTAL
ON
PAGE TOTALS
3.PRINT LIST
The page totals are cleared.
Stop
7
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs
System Manager Settings
6
You can specify whether to accept or reject print jobs from computers that do not
correspond with a registered Department ID.
NOTE
The default setting is 'ON'.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞ press [OK].
] until
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <MANAGE DEPT. ID> appears ➞
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 3 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
The <MANAGE DEPT. ID> menu appears.
6-22
Department ID Management
3
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in step 4 of "Specifying Department ID
Management," on p. 6-8.
OK
4
OK
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <PDL JOBS W/OUT ID> appears
MANAGE DEPT. ID
3.PDL JOBS W/OUT ID
PDL JOBS W/OUT ID
ON
The <PDL JOBS W/OUT ID> menu appears.
5
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> or <OFF> ➞ press [OK].
PDL JOBS W/OUT ID
OK
ON
SYSTEM SETTINGS
4.MANAGE USER ID
Details of each item are shown below.
<OFF>: The machine does not accept print jobs from computers that do not
correspond with a registered Department ID, and you must enter a
Department ID and password to operate the machine.
The selected mode is set.
Stop
6
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Department ID Management
6-23
6
System Manager Settings
<ON>: The machine accepts print jobs from computers that do not correspond
with a registered Department ID.
Managing User IDs
You can set whether or not to use the User ID Management.
The User ID Management function enables you to register information for each of
the User IDs from 0001 to 1000.
NOTE
• The User ID and password can be registered only from the Remote UI. For more
information on the User ID Management, see the Remote UI Guide.
• You need to register the User ID and password before you set this mode to 'ON'.
• One Department ID can be registered for each User ID.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
System Manager Settings
6
The Additional Functions menu appears.
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
OK
ADD. FUNCTIONS
9.SYSTEM SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.SYS. MANAGER INFO
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <MANAGE USER ID> appears ➞
SYSTEM SETTINGS
4.MANAGE USER ID
The <MANAGE USER ID> menu appears.
6-24
Managing User IDs
MANAGE USER ID
OFF
4
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> or <OFF> ➞ press [OK].
If you do not want to use the User ID Management, select <OFF>.
OK
MANAGE USER ID
ON
SYSTEM SETTINGS
5.NETWORK SETTINGS
The selected mode is set.
5
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
6
System Manager Settings
Stop
Managing User IDs
6-25
Remote UI
You can set whether to enable the Remote UI (User Interface) to operate the
machine and change settings.
The imageRUNNER 2020/2016 comes standard equipped with a direct Ethernet
connection interface. Once the Ethernet interface port is configured properly, the
imageRUNNER 2020/2016 can be controlled and set up through the Remote UI
and network. You can also use the Remote UI to fax from your computer using the
Ethernet connection.
NOTE
• For more information on the Remote UI, see the Remote UI Guide.
• For instructions on configuring the Ethernet port, see the Network Guide.
• The default setting is 'ON'.
System Manager Settings
6
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
The Additional Functions menu appears.
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
OK
ADD. FUNCTIONS
9.SYSTEM SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.SYS. MANAGER INFO
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <REMOTE UI> appears ➞
SYSTEM SETTINGS
7.REMOTE UI
The <REMOTE UI> menu appears.
6-26
Remote UI
REMOTE UI
ON
4
Press [
] or [
REMOTE UI
OK
] to select <ON> or <OFF> ➞ press [OK].
ON
SYSTEM SETTINGS
8.ACCESS TO DEST.
Details of each item are shown below.
<ON>: Settings can be specified and the machine can be operated through the
Remote UI.
<OFF>: Settings cannot be specified and the machine cannot be operated
through the Remote UI.
The selected mode is set.
5
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
NOTE
The Remote UI is enabled only after you restart the machine (the main power
switch is turned OFF, and then back ON).
6
System Manager Settings
Stop
Remote UI
6-27
Restricting Access to Destinations
This mode enables you to restrict the entering of new addresses, and restrict the
sending of faxes from computers using the fax driver.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
The Additional Functions menu appears.
2
6
] until <SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
OK
System Manager Settings
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
9.SYSTEM SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.SYS. MANAGER INFO
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
OK
3
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <ACCESS TO DEST.> appears ➞
SYSTEM SETTINGS
8.ACCESS TO DEST.
ACCESS TO DEST.
1.RESTRICT NEW ADD.
The <ACCESS TO DEST.> menu appears.
● If you want to restrict the entering of new addresses:
❑ Press [
OK
6-28
] or [
] to select <RESTRICT NEW ADD.> ➞ press [OK].
ACCESS TO DEST.
1.RESTRICT NEW ADD.
Restricting Access to Destinations
RESTRICT NEW ADD.
OFF
❑ Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
When you select <ON>, the following actions are restricted:
- Specifying a destination using the numeric keys.
- Changing registered destinations.
- Registering new destinations.
OK
If you do not want to restrict the entering of new addresses, select <OFF>.
RESTRICT NEW ADD.
ON
ACCESS TO DEST.
2.FAX DRIVER TX
The selected mode is set.
● If you want to allow the sending of faxes from a computer using the
fax driver:
] or [
] to select <FAX DRIVER TX> ➞ press [OK].
FAX DRIVER TX
ACCESS TO DEST.
2.FAX DRIVER TX
OK
❑ Press [
] or [
ON
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
6
If you do not want to allow the sending of faxes from a computer using the fax
driver, select <OFF>.
OK
FAX DRIVER TX
ON
SYSTEM SETTINGS
9.CHECKING THE LOG
The selected mode is set.
Stop
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Restricting Access to Destinations
6-29
System Manager Settings
❑ Press [
Checking the TX/RX Log
You can specify whether or not to check the <TX/RX LOG>. When you set
<CHECKING THE LOG> to 'ON', you can check the <TX/RX LOG> using System
Monitor screen. When you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to 'OFF', the System
Monitor screen cannot be used to check the <TX/RX LOG>, and the Activity Report
will not be printed out automatically.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
The Additional Functions menu appears.
6
System Manager Settings
2
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
OK
ADD. FUNCTIONS
9.SYSTEM SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.SYS. MANAGER INFO
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <CHECKING THE LOG> appears
SYSTEM SETTINGS
9.CHECKING THE LOG
CHECKING THE LOG
The <CHECKING THE LOG> menu appears.
6-30
Checking the TX/RX Log
ON
4
Press [
] or [
CHECKING THE LOG
OK
] to select <ON> or <OFF> ➞ press [OK].
ON
SYSTEM SETTINGS
10.USE DEVICE USB
Details of each item are shown below.
<ON>: You can check the TX/RX log using the System Monitor screen.
<OFF>: You cannot check the TX/RX log using the System Monitor screen.
The selected mode is set.
5
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
6
System Manager Settings
Stop
Checking the TX/RX Log
6-31
Restricting the USB Interface Port
Follow the procedure below to restrict jobs through the USB interface.
NOTE
The default setting is 'ON'.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
The Additional Functions menu appears.
2
System Manager Settings
6
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
OK
ADD. FUNCTIONS
9.SYSTEM SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.SYS. MANAGER INFO
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <USE DEVICE USB> appears ➞
SYSTEM SETTINGS
10.USE DEVICE USB
The <USE DEVICE USB> menu appears.
6-32
Restricting the USB Interface Port
USE DEVICE USB
ON
4
Press [
] or [
USE DEVICE USB
OK
] to select <ON> or <OFF> ➞ press [OK].
ON
100% AUTO
A TEXT
O1
Details of each item are shown below.
<ON>: The machine accepts jobs through the USB interface.
<OFF>: The machine does not accept jobs through the USB interface.
The selected mode is set, and the screen returns to the Standby display.
Restart the machine.
Turn OFF the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it ON.
6
System Manager Settings
5
Restricting the USB Interface Port
6-33
Device Information Settings
Device Information enables you to set a name for the machine, and enter
information regarding its location.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
The Additional Functions menu appears.
2
6
] until <SYSTEM SETTINGS> appears ➞
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System
Manager ID and System Password using the numeric keys ➞ press ID (ID).
OK
System Manager Settings
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
9.SYSTEM SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1.SYS. MANAGER INFO
The <SYSTEM SETTINGS> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <DEVICE INFO> appears ➞
SYSTEM SETTINGS
2.DEVICE INFO
DEVICE INFO
1.DEVICE NAME
The <DEVICE INFO> menu appears.
4
OK
6-34
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
DEVICE INFO
1.DEVICE NAME
Device Information Settings
] to select <DEVICE NAME> ➞
DEVICE NAME
:A
ABC
DEF
2
1
GHI
JKL
4
PQRS
3
5
MNO
6
5
TUV
Enter the name of the machine using the numeric keys ➞
press [OK].
WXYZ
8
7
9
The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 32.
SYMBOLS
Tone
#
0
DEVICE NAME
imageRUNNER
OK
:A
DEVICE INFO
2.LOCATION
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see "Entering Characters," on p. 2-8.
6
ABC
DEF
2
1
JKL
3
7
MNO
4
] to select <LOCATION> ➞ press [OK].
6
5
TUV
LOCATION
:A
Enter the location of the machine using the numeric keys ➞
press [OK].
WXYZ
8
7
9
0
6
The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 32.
SYMBOLS
Tone
#
LOCATION
A-3F
OK
:A
System Manager Settings
PQRS
] or [
DEVICE INFO
2.LOCATION
OK
GHI
Press [
SYSTEM SETTINGS
3.MANAGE DEPT. ID
The device name and the location of the machine are set.
NOTE
For instructions on entering characters, see "Entering Characters," on p. 2-8.
Stop
8
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Device Information Settings
6-35
Routine Maintenance
7
CHAPTER
This chapter describes how to load paper, perform routine cleaning operations, and replace
consumables, such as toner and staple cartridges.
Paper Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Feeder (DADF-P1) (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Replacing the Staple Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Routine Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Platen Glass and Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Manual Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26
Automatic Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Transcription Roller Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31
Drum Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Fuser Roller Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33
Adjusting the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Print Quality and Density Improvement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35
Prevent Paper Curls or Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Prevent Paper Jams in the Two-Sided Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Using Lightweight Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
Setting the Special Bond Fixing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-39
Setting the Fixing Unit Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40
Feeder Smudge Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
7-1
Paper Drawers
This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawers.
NOTE
• The following paper sizes can be loaded in the paper drawers 1, 2, 3, and 4:
- LGL
- LTR
- LTRR
- 11" × 17"
- STMT
• Paper drawer 2 is standard on imageRUNNER 2020, or can be added to imageRUNNER
2016 by attaching the optional Cassette Feeding Module-J1.
• Paper drawer 3 and 4 can be added by attaching the optional Cassette Feeding
Module-K1.
• For more information on available paper stock which can be loaded in the paper drawers,
see "Available Paper Stock," on p. 2-24.
Loading Paper
Routine Maintenance
7
If the selected paper runs out, or the selected paper drawer runs out of paper
during printing, a screen prompting you to load paper appears on the LCD display,
and the error indicator blinks in red.
LOAD PAPER
DRAWER 1 :LTR
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
7-2
Paper Drawers
IMPORTANT
• A screen prompting you to load paper also appears if the selected paper drawer is not
fully inserted into the machine. Make sure that the paper drawer is properly in place.
• Do not load nonstandard paper sizes into the paper drawers.
• Do not load the following types of paper into the paper drawers, as this may cause paper
jams:
- Severely curled or wrinkled paper
- Lightweight straw paper: less than 17 lb bond (64 g/m2) (approximately)
- Transparencies
- Envelopes
- Labels
- Paper on which color images have been copied (Do not copy on the reverse side
either.)
- Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not print on the
reverse side this paper either.)
• Fan the stack of paper well before loading it, and align the edges of the paper stack on a
flat surface.
• Never place paper or any other items in the empty part of the drawer next to the paper
stack. Doing so may cause paper jams.
1
Grip the handle of the paper drawer and pull out the paper
drawer until it stops.
Paper Drawers
7
Routine Maintenance
NOTE
• If a message prompting you to load paper appears during printing, the remaining prints
are automatically made after you load the correct paper. If you select another paper
drawer, the remaining prints are made after you press [OK].
• To cancel printing, press
(Stop).
7-3
2
Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack from
package.
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the
paper.
IMPORTANT
Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store it in a dry place,
away from direct sunlight.
NOTE
• For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
• Before loading paper, always fan the sheets several times, and align the edges to
facilitate feeding.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-4
Paper Drawers
3
Push down the metal plate to lock.
4
Load the paper stack into the paper drawer.
Even out the edges of the paper stack. Load the paper stack against the end
guide of the paper drawer.
When loading paper in the paper drawer for the first time, set the size plate and
the paper-size detecting lever for the paper being loaded. (See "Adjusting a
Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size," on p. 7-7.)
7
Routine Maintenance
When loading paper in the paper drawer, make sure that the paper size setting of
the paper drawer matches the size of paper. (See "Adjusting a Paper Drawer to
Hold a Different Paper Size," on p. 7-7.)
Paper Drawers
7-5
IMPORTANT
• Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use.
• Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark
(
) at the back of the paper drawer and the corners are below the paper size
guide clips.
• Be sure to set the paper-size detecting lever correctly. If the lever is set to the
wrong position, paper jams or dirty prints may occur, or the inside of the machine
may get dirty.
NOTE
• Each paper drawer holds about 250 sheets of paper (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
• If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to
load, follow those instructions.
• When the paper is loaded into the paper drawer, the side facing up is the one
printed on.
• If problems occur, such as poor print quality or paper jams, try turning the paper
stack over, and reload it.
• For more information on the print direction of preprinted paper (paper which has
logos or patterns already printed on it), see "Relationship between Original
Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart," on p. 9-11.
5
Routine Maintenance
7
Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it
clicks into space in the closed position.
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
You will not be able to make copies or prints if you load paper that exceeds the
loading limit, or if the paper drawer is not completely pushed into the machine.
Always check that the paper drawers are in place, and that the paper does not
exceed the loading limit.
7-6
Paper Drawers
NOTE
If paper runs out during copying or printing, load a new paper stack, and follow the
instructions on the LCD display. The machine automatically restarts, and produces
the remaining copies or prints.
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size
If you want to change the size of paper in a paper drawer, follow the procedure
described below to adjust the paper drawer guides.
NOTE
Please contact your Canon service representative about the settings for U1, U2, and U3
paper.
1
Pull out the paper drawer, and remove all the loaded paper.
2
Routine Maintenance
7
Push down the metal plate to lock.
Paper Drawers
7-7
3
Detach the end guide and reattach it to the slots with the mark
indicating the desired paper size.
Detach the end guide by pressing down and forward. Align the end guide with
the mark indicating the desired paper size. Reattach the end guide by tilting it
forward and inserting the tabs at both ends into the slots. The end guide should
then be returned to its vertical, upright position.
NOTE
• Attach the end guide while pressing down the point indicated with 'A'.
• When you set for 11" × 17" paper, attach the end guide to the 11" × 17" indicator on
the rear right side of the paper drawer.
7
Routine Maintenance
4
7-8
Lift the lock lever on the side guide to its upright position and
slide the side guide to the groove marked for the desired
paper size.
Paper Drawers
5
Lower the lock lever to the left to lock the side guide.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to set the lock lever correctly. If the lock lever is positioned incorrectly to the
type of paper loaded in the paper drawer, the wrong paper type will be shown on
the screen. This may also cause paper jams, dirty prints, or make the inside the
machine dirty.
Load the appropriate size paper into the paper drawer.
7
Routine Maintenance
6
CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the
paper.
Paper Drawers
7-9
7
Set the paper-size detecting lever, located on the left side of
the paper drawer, to match the size of the paper being loaded.
A4
A3
A5
A4
B5
B4
LGL
B5
11X17
LTR
STMT
LTR
U2
U1
U3
IMPORTANT
Be sure to set the paper-size detecting lever correctly. If the lever is positioned
incorrectly to the size of paper loaded in the paper drawer, the wrong paper size will
be shown on the LCD. This may also cause paper jams, dirty prints, or make the
inside the machine dirty.
NOTE
<LTRR> displayed on the LCD indicates the paper size label or punch mark of
'LTR ' on the paper drawers.
Routine Maintenance
7
8
7-10
Stick the appropriate paper size label on the paper size plate.
Paper Drawers
10
Change the paper size plate to match the new paper size.
Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it
clicks into place in the closed position.
7
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Paper Drawers
7-11
Routine Maintenance
9
Feeder (DADF-P1) (Optional)
Originals sent by fax via the feeder can be stamped to indicate that they have been
sent. Replace the stamp cartridge when this mark is faint or no longer visible.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the stamp cartridge, take care not to allow ink to come in contact with
your hands or clothing. If ink gets onto your hands or clothing, wash it off immediately
with water.
NOTE
The stamp cartridge is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is attached.
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge
1
Open the feeder cover, then open the inner cover by holding
the green handle toward you.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-12
Feeder (DADF-P1) (Optional)
2
Remove the old stamp cartridge using the tweezers.
NOTE
Widen the tweezers if necessary.
Insert a new stamp cartridge into the feeder until it clicks
using the tweezers.
7
IMPORTANT
• Set the stamp cartridge so that the two projections on the cartridge are aligned with
the hollows on the feeder.
• Be careful that the stamping surface of the stamp cartridge does not protrude.
• Insert the stamp cartridge properly, or it may cause paper jams.
Feeder (DADF-P1) (Optional)
7-13
Routine Maintenance
3
4
Gently close the inner cover and the feeder cover until it
clicks.
CAUTION
When closing the covers, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-14
Feeder (DADF-P1) (Optional)
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
When there is only a small amount of toner remaining in the machine, the message
<TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> blinks on the LCD display. You can
continue printing, but at this time you should purchase a new toner cartridge to
have it available when needed.
TONER LOW
PREPARE NEW TONER
When toner runs out completely and prints can no longer be made, the message
<OUT OF TONER/CHANGE TONER> appears on the LCD display. Follow the
procedure described below to help you replace the toner cartridge.
OUT OF TONER
CHANGE TONER
WARNING
the toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
• Do not store toner cartridges or paper in places exposed to open flames, as this
may cause the toner or paper to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
• When discarding used toner cartridges, put the cartridges in a bag to prevent
the toner remaining inside the cartridges from scattering, and dispose of them
in a location away from open flames.
CAUTION
• Keep toner out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested, consult a
physician immediately.
• Take care not to allow toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing. If
toner gets onto your hands or clothing, wash it off immediately with cold water.
Washing it off with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to
remove the toner stains.
IMPORTANT
• Use only the toner cartridge recommended for use on this machine.
• Do not replace toner cartridges until the message prompting you to do so appears.
• Do not attempt to replace the toner cartridge while the machine is printing.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
7-15
7
Routine Maintenance
• Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause
NOTE
• When the message <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> appears, approximately
100 prints can still be made. However, since this number may vary depending upon the
original, it is recommended to replace the toner cartridge soon after the <TONER LOW/
PREPARE NEW TONER> message appears.
• If the toner runs out during a print job, the machine will start printing the remaining pages
automatically after you replace the toner cartridge.
1
2
Routine Maintenance
7
Open the front cover.
While pushing down the release tab, turn the toner cartridge
in the direction of the arrow in the illustration below.
Release Tab
7-16
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
4
While pushing down the release tab, pull the toner cartridge
out in the direction of the arrow in the illustration below.
Rock the new toner cartridge five or six times to distribute the
toner evenly inside the cartridge.
7
WARNING
Do not throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as they may ignite
the toner remaining inside the cartridge, and result in burns or a fire.
IMPORTANT
If the toner is not distributed evenly inside the cartridge, the printing quality
deteriorates.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
7-17
Routine Maintenance
3
5
6
With the side with the label facing up, insert the new toner
cartridge in the direction of the arrow while grasping its
handle.
Hold the toner cartridge with one hand, and remove the seal
by pulling it out with the other hand.
Routine Maintenance
7
IMPORTANT
• Pull out the seal slowly, otherwise the scattered toner may soil your clothes, etc.
• Pull out the seal completely, otherwise the print error may occur.
• Pulling the seal upwards or downwards may break the seal. If the seal could break
inside the toner cartridge and cannot be removed completely, the toner cartridge
may not be used.
• Ensure seal is pulled out completely from the toner cartridge because the toner
may scatter and printing quality may deteriorate.
• Throw away the seal after removing it from the toner cartridge.
7-18
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
7
Turn the toner cartridge in the direction of the arrow.
IMPORTANT
Turn the toner cartridge fully until it locks into place.
Close the front cover.
7
CAUTION
When closing the front cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to clean the roller every time you replace the toner cartridge. See "Fuser
Roller Cleaning," on p. 7-33.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
7-19
Routine Maintenance
8
Replacing the Staple Cartridge
When the optional Finisher-U1 is almost out of staples and the staple cartridge
must be replaced, the following display appears. Follow the procedure described
below to replace the staple cartridge.
OUT OF STAPLES
REPLACE STAPLE CART.
NOTE
We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer
before your stock runs out.
1
Open the front cover of the finisher.
2
Pull out the staple case, holding the tab as illustrated below.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-20
Replacing the Staple Cartridge
3
Press the area indicated by PUSH, and then pull out the empty
staple cartridge.
Place the staple case, as shown below, and pull out the staple cartridge.
Insert the new staple cartridge.
Press the spring-loaded case down until it clicks into place.
7
IMPORTANT
• Use only staple cartridges intended for use with this machine.
• Do not remove the seal that holds the staples together before you place the staple
cartridge into the staple case.
NOTE
Only one staple cartridge can be inserted at a time.
Replacing the Staple Cartridge
7-21
Routine Maintenance
4
5
Remove the seal holding the staples together, by pulling it
straight out, and then down.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you pull the seal straight out, and then down. If you pull it out at an
angle, it may tear.
6
Gently push the staple case into the finisher until it is securely
in place.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-22
Replacing the Staple Cartridge
Close the front cover of the finisher.
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
7
Routine Maintenance
7
Replacing the Staple Cartridge
7-23
Routine Cleaning
If the original is not copied clearly, clean the following parts of the machine. For
high-quality printouts, we recommend cleaning these parts once or twice a month.
• Platen glass
• Underside of the feeder/platen cover
• Feeder scanning area
• White plate, roller
WARNING
• When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch and
disconnect the power cord. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other solvents for cleaning, as
this may result in plastic parts becoming deformed.
CAUTION
• Unplug the power plug from the outlet at least once a year, and clean the plug’s
7
Routine Maintenance
metal pins and the area surrounding them to ensure all dust is removed. If dust
accumulates in this area, it may result in a fire.
• Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or damage
the machine.
• Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area
around the base of the power plug’s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry
cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is
connected for a long period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust
can build up around the power plug and become damp. This may cause a short
circuit and result in a fire.
7-24
Routine Cleaning
Platen Glass and Cover
Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder/platen cover following the
procedure below.
IMPORTANT
If the platen glass or the underside of the feeder/platen cover is dirty, the original may not
be scanned clearly, or the size of the original may be detected incorrectly. (Only the
imageRUNNER 2020 model can detect the size of the original placed on the platen
glass.)
Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder/platen
cover with a cloth dampened with water, and wipe them with a
soft and dry cloth.
7
IMPORTANT
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the
machine.
Routine Cleaning
7-25
Routine Maintenance
1
Manual Feeder Cleaning
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after copying them using the
feeder, this may be caused by pencil writing rubbing off the originals and onto the
roller. Perform this feeder cleaning procedure to clean the feeder scanning area,
film, and roller.
IMPORTANT
• Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the
machine.
• If the feeder scanning area is dirty, it may result in a paper jam or blemished print output.
NOTE
Clean the roller while spinning it with your hand.
1
Open the feeder cover.
Routine Maintenance
7
2
7-26
Clean the rollers (a total of three places) inside the feeder
cover with a cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area
with a soft, dry cloth.
Routine Cleaning
3
4
Open the inner cover, holding it by its front tab.
Clean the rollers (a total of three places) inside the inner cover
with a cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a
soft, dry cloth.
5
Clean the transparent plastic part of the inner cover with a
cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a soft, dry
cloth.
Routine Cleaning
7-27
Routine Maintenance
7
6
Close the inner cover.
CAUTION
When closing the inner cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
7
Close the feeder cover.
Routine Maintenance
7
CAUTION
When closing the feeder cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught,
as this may result in personal injury.
7-28
Routine Cleaning
9
Open the feeder/platen cover.
Clean the feeder scanning area (the left side of the platen
glass) and the document feeding roller, with a cloth dampened
with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
7
Document Feeding Roller
Routine Maintenance
8
Feeder Scanning Area
Routine Cleaning
7-29
10
Close the feeder/platen cover.
CAUTION
When closing the feeder/platen cover, be careful not to get your fingers
caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Automatic Feeder Cleaning
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the
optional feeder, clean the rollers of the feeder by repeatedly feeding blank sheets of
paper through it.
Routine Maintenance
7
NOTE
• This procedure is necessary only if the optional Feeder (DADF-P1) is attached.
• It takes about 20 seconds to clean the feeder.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <ADJUST./CLEANING> appears ➞
ADD. FUNCTIONS
7.ADJUST./CLEANING
The <ADJUST./CLEANING> menu appears.
7-30
Routine Cleaning
ADJUST./CLEANING
1.TRANS. ROLR CLEAN
3
OK
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <FEEDER CLEANING> appears ➞
ADJUST./CLEANING
4.FEEDER CLEANING
4
SET 5 SHEETS IN ADF
PRESS OK KEY
Place 5 sheets of blank paper into the feeder ➞ press [OK].
Make sure that you fan the sheets of paper well.
Use LTR paper.
SET 5 SHEETS IN ADF
PRESS OK KEY
CLEANING
PLEASE WAIT
After the cleaning is completed, the screen returns to the Standby display.
The feeder is clean. Try scanning again.
Transcription Roller Cleaning
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<ADJUST./CLEANING> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Feeder
Cleaning," on p. 7-30.
OK
The <ADJUST./CLEANING> menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <TRANS. ROLR CLEAN> appears
ADJUST./CLEANING
1.TRANS. ROLR CLEAN
CLEANING
PLEASE WAIT
The machine starts the transcription roller cleaning.
After the cleaning is completed, the screen returns to the Standby display.
Routine Cleaning
7
Routine Maintenance
If the back side of paper is smudged with printing, the transcription roller in the main
unit may be dirty. Should this occur, use the Transcription Roller Cleaning function
to clean the transcription roller.
7-31
Drum Cleaning
If print quality decreases, the drum in the main unit may be dirty. Should this occur,
use the Drum Cleaning function to clean the drum.
IMPORTANT
Use of this function will shorten the life of the drum.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<ADJUST./CLEANING> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Feeder
Cleaning," on p. 7-30.
OK
The <ADJUST./CLEANING> menu appears.
2
OK
7
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <DRUM CLEANING> appears ➞
ADJUST./CLEANING
2.DRUM CLEANING
CLEANING
PLEASE WAIT
Routine Maintenance
The machine starts the drum cleaning.
After the cleaning is completed, the display returns to the Standby display.
7-32
Routine Cleaning
Fuser Roller Cleaning
If black streaks appear with printing, the fuser roller in the main unit may be dirty.
Should this occur, use the Roller Cleaning function to clean the roller. The roller
should also be cleaned each time the toner cartridge is replaced. Before cleaning
the roller, print out the cleaning pattern. Then load the sheet into the stack bypass
and start cleaning.
IMPORTANT
The cleaning pattern can only be printed on LTR paper.
NOTE
Cleaning the roller takes approximately 100 seconds.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<ADJUST./CLEANING> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Automatic Feeder
Cleaning," on p. 7-30.
OK
The <ADJUST./CLEANING> menu appears.
OK
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <FIX. UNIT CLEANING> appears
ADJUST./CLEANING
3.FIX.UNIT CLEANING
FIX.UNIT CLEANING
1.START CLEANING
The <FIX. UNIT CLEANING> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <CLEAN PAPER PRT> appears ➞
FIX.UNIT CLEANING
2.CLEAN PAPER PRT
CLEAN PAPER PRT
PLEASE WAIT
The cleaning paper is printed. You will use this paper as the cleaning paper.
Routine Cleaning
7-33
7
Routine Maintenance
2
4
5
Open the stack bypass.
Load the cleaning paper with the side on which the letter "V"
is printed facing up.
Routine Maintenance
7
6
OK
Follow steps 1 and 2 ➞ press [OK] to select <START
CLEANING>.
FIX.UNIT CLEANING
1.START CLEANING
CLEANING
PLEASE WAIT
The machine starts cleaning the roller.
NOTE
• Use standard paper as the cleaning paper.
• If a cleaning paper jam occurs, the error indicator blinks in red. Press
and remove the jammed cleaning paper.
• Throw away the cleaning paper after use.
7-34
Routine Cleaning
(Stop)
Adjusting the Machine
This section describes the settings to improve the print quality and to prevent paper
jams which may occur when a variety of functions are used.
Use of these settings will help to prevent a number of problems before they occur.
Print Quality and Density Improvement
If print quality decreases or an irregularity of the print density appears, the
transcription output may not work adequately. Use Special Mode M to improve the
print quality or irregular print density.
1
Press [Additional Functions].
ADD. FUNCTIONS
1.COMMON SETTINGS
7
The Additional Functions menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <ADJUST./CLEANING> appears ➞
ADD. FUNCTIONS
7.ADJUST./CLEANING
ADJUST./CLEANING
1.TRANS. ROLR CLEAN
The <ADJUST./CLEANING> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <SPECIAL MODE M> appears ➞
ADJUST./CLEANING
5.SPECIAL MODE M
SPECIAL MODE M
MID
The <SPECIAL MODE M> menu appears.
Adjusting the Machine
7-35
Routine Maintenance
Additional
Functions
4
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
SPECIAL MODE M
] to select <MID>, <LOW>, or <HIGH> ➞
MID
ADJUST./CLEANING
6.SPECIAL MODE N
Details of each item are shown below.
<MID>: If normal circumstances, use the default setting. Outputs can be
printed by the normal density.
<LOW>: Compensate for poor print quality that occurs when using paper that
was stored for a long period of time at high temperature and high
humidity.
<HIGH>: Compensate for poor quality that occurs when using heavyweight
paper.
The level of the print density is set.
Stop
5
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Prevent Paper Curls or Jams
7
Routine Maintenance
When the two-sided printing function is used, paper may curl severely or become
jammed. Use Special Mode N to prevent paper curling or jamming.
IMPORTANT
Do not use paper that has been exposed to high temperature or humidity for an extended
period of time. Two-sided printing on such paper will frequently result in a paper jam.
NOTE
Printing times with Special Mode N activated are longer than when the function is not
used.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<ADJUST./CLEANING> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Print Quality and Density
Improvement," on p. 7-35.
OK
7-36
The <ADJUST./CLEANING> menu appears.
Adjusting the Machine
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <SPECIAL MODE N> appears ➞
ADJUST./CLEANING
6.SPECIAL MODE N
SPECIAL MODE N
OFF
The <SPECIAL MODE N> menu appears.
3
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
SPECIAL MODE N
OK
ON
ADJUST./CLEANING
7.SPECIAL MODE O
Special Mode N is activated.
Stop
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Prevent Paper Jams in the Two-Sided Mode
IMPORTANT
Do not use paper that has been exposed to high temperature or humidity for an extended
period of time. Two-sided printing on such paper will frequently result in a paper jam.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<ADJUST./CLEANING> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Print Quality and Density
Improvement," on p. 7-35.
OK
The <ADJUST./CLEANING> menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <SPECIAL MODE O> appears ➞
ADJUST./CLEANING
7.SPECIAL MODE O
SPECIAL MODE O
1.DRAWER
The <SPECIAL MODE O> menu appears.
Adjusting the Machine
7-37
7
Routine Maintenance
A paper jam may occur when printing the back side of paper using the two-sided
paper function. Use Special Mode O to prevent paper jams with two-sided printing.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
] to select <DRAWER> or <STACK
BYPASS> ➞ press [OK].
SPECIAL MODE O
1.DRAWER
4
Press [
] or [
DRAWER
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
DRAWER
OK
OFF
ON
SPECIAL MODE O
2.STACK BYPASS
Special Mode O is activated.
Stop
5
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Using Lightweight Paper
When you use the lightweight paper for printing, set this function to 'ON'.
NOTE
The Special Mode P helps limit a drop in the copy speed when printing on multiple sheets
of narrow-width paper in succession.
Routine Maintenance
7
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<ADJUST./CLEANING> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Print Quality and Density
Improvement," on p. 7-35.
OK
The <ADJUST./CLEANING> menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <SPECIAL MODE P> appears ➞
ADJUST./CLEANING
8.SPECIAL MODE P
The <SPECIAL MODE P> menu appears.
7-38
Adjusting the Machine
SPECIAL MODE P
OFF
3
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
SPECIAL MODE P
OK
ON
ADJUST./CLEANING
9.BOND SP.FIX. MODE
Special Mode P is activated.
Stop
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Setting the Special Bond Fixing Mode
You can specify to perform special fixing for bond paper.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<ADJUST./CLEANING> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Print Quality and Density
Improvement," on p. 7-35.
OK
The <ADJUST./CLEANING> menu appears.
OK
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <BOND SP. FIX. MODE> appears
ADJUST./CLEANING
9.BOND SP.FIX. MODE
BOND SP.FIX. MODE
OFF
The <BOND SP. FIX. MODE> menu appears.
3
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
BOND SP.FIX. MODE
OK
ON
ADJUST./CLEANING
10.FIX. UNIT OFFSET
The Bond Sp. Fix. mode is activated.
Stop
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Adjusting the Machine
7-39
Routine Maintenance
2
7
Setting the Fixing Unit Offset Mode
While making prints, offset (a condition that a previously printed image also
appears faintly on the next output) may occur when you suddenly increase the
width of the paper for printing. This mode enables you choose whether to set a high
priority on avoiding offset or on speed.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<ADJUST./CLEANING> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Print Quality and Density
Improvement," on p. 7-35.
OK
The <ADJUST./CLEANING> menu appears.
2
OK
Press [
] or [
press [OK].
] until <FIX. UNIT OFFSET> appears ➞
ADJUST./CLEANING
10.FIX. UNIT OFFSET
7
FIX. UNIT OFFSET
OFF
Routine Maintenance
The <FIX. UNIT OFFSET> menu appears.
3
OK
Press [
] or [
] to select <SPEED PRIORITY 1>,
<SPEED PRIORITY 2>, or <OFF> ➞ press [OK].
FIX. UNIT OFFSET
SPEED PRIORITY1
ADJUST./CLEANING
11.AUTO ADF DRTY ADJ
Details of each item are shown below.
<OFF>: Quality is set as a high priority.
<SPEED PRIORITY 1>: Speed is set as a high priority.
<SPEED PRIORITY 2>: Speed is set as a medium priority.
The Fix. Unit Offset mode is set.
Stop
7-40
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Adjusting the Machine
Feeder Smudge Adjustment
If the feeder is dirty, copies may include unwarranted dots or lines. When this
function is set to 'ON', dust, dirt or foreign objects in the feeder will not be printed.
NOTE
While some dots or lines may continue to be printed when this function is set to 'ON',
copies are significantly clearer than when it is set to 'OFF'.
Additional
Functions
1
Press [Additional Functions] ➞ [
] or [
] until
<ADJUST./CLEANING> appears ➞ press [OK].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Print Quality and Density
Improvement," on p. 7-35.
OK
The <ADJUST./CLEANING> menu appears.
OK
Press [
] or [
➞ press [OK].
] until <AUTO ADF DRTY ADJ> appears
ADJUST./CLEANING
11.AUTO ADF DRTY ADJ
AUTO ADF DRTY ADJ
ON
The <AUTO ADF DRTY ADJ> menu appears.
3
Press [
] or [
] to select <ON> ➞ press [OK].
AUTO ADF DRTY ADJ
OK
ON
ADJUST./CLEANING
12.MAINTENANCE CODE
The function for adjusting the feeder smudged is activated.
Stop
4
Press [Stop] to return to the Standby display.
Adjusting the Machine
7-41
7
Routine Maintenance
2
Consumables
The following consumables and accessories are available from Canon. For more
information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
We recommend that you order paper stock and toner from your local authorized
Canon dealer before your stock runs out.
■ Paper Stock
In addition to plain paper (11" × 17", LGL, LTR, and STMT), recycled paper, color paper,
transparencies (recommended for this machine), labels and other types of paper stock are
available. For more information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Routine Maintenance
7
CAUTION
Do not store paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the
paper to ignite and result in burns or a fire.
IMPORTANT
• For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
• To prevent moisture build-up, store any remaining paper tightly wrapped in its original
package for storage.
• Some commercially available paper types are not suited for this machine. Contact your
local authorized Canon dealer when you need to purchase paper.
7-42
Consumables
■ Toner Cartridge
If a message prompting you to replace the toner cartridge appears on the LCD display,
replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
Use only the toner cartridges recommended for use with this machine.
WARNING
• Never dispose toner cartridges in a fire or incinerator, as this may result in an
explosion.
• Do not store toner cartridges in places exposed to open flames, as this may
cause the toner to ignite and result in burns or a fire.
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
• Store toner cartridges in a cool location, away from direct sunlight.
- The recommended storage conditions are: temperature below 86 °F (30 °C), and
humidity below 80 %.
• Never store the cartridges in a vertical position.
Consumables
7
Routine Maintenance
Keep toner and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these
items are ingested, consult a physician immediately.
7-43
■ Staple Cartridge
Use only the staple cartridges recommended for use with this machine.
NOTE
We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer
before these cartridges are exhausted.
■ Stamp Cartridge
The stamp cartridge is used to stamp originals.
Use only the stamp cartridges recommended for use with this machine.
Routine Maintenance
7
7-44
Consumables
■ Genuine Supplies
Canon has developed and manufactured Toner, Parts, and Supplies specifically for use in
this machine. For optimal print quality and for optimal machine performance and
productivity, we recommend that you use Genuine Canon Toner, Parts, and Supplies.
Contact your Canon Authorized Dealer or Service Provider for Genuine Canon Supplies.
Routine Maintenance
7
Consumables
7-45
Troubleshooting
8
CHAPTER
This chapter describes what to do in response to paper jams in the main unit or optional units,
and an error message display.
Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Displays Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Fixing Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Paper Drawer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Paper Drawers 2, 3, and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Duplex Unit-A1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Feeder (DADF-P1) (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Finisher-U1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Clearing Staple Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Finisher-U1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
List of Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Self-Diagnostic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Service Call Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Contacting Your Local Authorized Canon Dealer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
8-1
Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams
If paper jams occur frequently, even though there is no apparent problem with the
machine, either one of the following two reasons may be the cause. Follow the
instructions described below to reduce the frequency of paper jams.
■ There are torn pieces of paper left inside the machine.
Pulling jammed paper out of the machine by force may leave parts of the paper torn
inside, leading to frequent paper jams. If paper tears while you are trying to remove
jammed paper from the machine, make sure that you remove all torn pieces.
■ The paper-size detecting lever is set incorrectly.
Troubleshooting
Make sure that the paper-size detecting lever located on the left side of a paper drawer
matches the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer. If the paper-size detecting lever
is set incorrectly, paper jams may occur more frequently. (See "Adjusting a Paper Drawer
to Hold a Different Paper Size," on p. 7-7.)
8
8-2
Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams
Displays Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, one of the following screens appears and the jam location
indicator lights on the control panel.
PAPER JAM
OPEN LEFT COVER
Troubleshooting
PAPER JAM
OPEN LEFT/DRWR COVER
CHECK DOCUMENT
FINISHER PAPER JAM
OPEN LEFT COVER
8
FEEDER PAPER JAM
CHECK THE FEEDER
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-3
CAUTION
• When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on
the edges of the original or paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
Troubleshooting
not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the parts on the inside the machine.
If you cannot remove the paper, please contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty,
wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the
toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during
use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine,
do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or
electrical shock.
IMPORTANT
When a paper jam occurs in the feeder, you cannot continue operating the machine.
Follow the procedure to remove the jammed paper. (See "Feeder (DADF-P1) (Optional),"
on p. 8-20.)
8
1
Check the jam location indicator on the control panel, and
remove any jammed paper.
See the appropriate pages below for instructions on finding and removing
jammed paper. Or, you can follow the message on the LCD display.
If jammed paper tears while being removed, be sure to remove any remaining
pieces from inside the machine.
IMPORTANT
If the machine’s power is turned OFF when there is a paper jam, detection of paper
jams in the paper drawers is not possible after the power is turned back ON. Clear
paper jams without turning the power OFF.
8-4
Clearing Paper Jams
NOTE
• Some areas that are shown to have paper jams may not actually have paper jams.
However, always check the jam locations indicator on the control panel.
• The following image which is in the upper left corner of the control panel, indicates
the possible locations where paper jams may occur, and the page number
describing how to remove the jammed paper.
a
2
a Feeder
See "Feeder (DADF-P1) (Optional)," on
p. 8-20.
b Finisher-U1
See "Finisher-U1 (Optional)," on p.
8-24.
b Inner 2 Way Tray-E1
See "Inner 2 Way Tray-E1 (Optional),"
on p. 8-28.
c Stack bypass
See "Stack Bypass," on p. 8-16.
c Duplex Unit-A1
See "Duplex Unit-A1 (Optional)," on p.
8-17.
c Fixing unit
See "Fixing Unit," on p. 8-6.
c Paper drawers
See "Paper Drawer 1," on p. 8-9, and
"Paper Drawers 2, 3, and 4," on p.
8-13.
After you have cleared all the paper jams at the locations
indicated on the control panel, restore all the levers and
covers to their original positions.
Once you have removed all of the jammed paper in locations other than the
optional feeder, printing or copying resumes.
NOTE
You do not have to re-enter the number of copies or prints, even if you are printing
multiple sets. The machine automatically recalculates the number of copies or
prints to make based on the number of sheets that have jammed.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-5
Troubleshooting
b
c
8
Fixing Unit
If a paper jam occurs in the fixing unit, the following screen appears. Follow the
procedure described below to remove the jammed paper.
PAPER JAM
OPEN LEFT COVER
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during
Troubleshooting
use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine,
do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or
electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the original or paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
8
1
8-6
Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open
the left cover.
Clearing Paper Jams
2
Push down the green fixing lever.
CAUTION
3
Troubleshooting
The parts located around the exit slot guide and the fixing unit are subject
to high temperature. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch
anything in this area except the lever.
Hold the green knob, lift the upper cover of the fixing unit.
8
Clearing Paper Jams
8-7
Remove any jammed paper.
5
Push up the green fixing lever.
Troubleshooting
4
8
6
8-8
Place your hand where the hand symbol is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover
until it clicks into place in the closed position.
Clearing Paper Jams
CAUTION
When closing the left cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
Paper Drawer 1
If a paper jam occurs inside paper drawer 1, the following screen appears. Follow
the procedure described below to remove the jammed paper.
PAPER JAM
OPEN LEFT COVER
WARNING
CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during
use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine,
do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or
electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the original or paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-9
Troubleshooting
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
8
1
Troubleshooting
2
Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open
the left cover.
Hold the green knob, and pull down the paper drawer’s left
cover.
8
3
8-10
Remove any jammed paper.
Clearing Paper Jams
5
Pull out the paper drawer and remove any jammed paper.
Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it
clicks.
Troubleshooting
4
8
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-11
6
Close the paper drawer’s left cover.
CAUTION
When closing the paper drawer’s left cover, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Troubleshooting
7
Place your hand where the hand symbol is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover
until it clicks into place in the closed position.
8
CAUTION
When closing the left cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
8-12
Clearing Paper Jams
Paper Drawers 2, 3, and 4
If a paper jam occurs inside paper drawers 2, 3, and 4, the following screen
appears. Follow the procedure described below to remove the jammed paper.
PAPER JAM
OPEN LEFT/DRWR COVER
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine,
do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or
electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the original or paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
NOTE
• Cassette Feeding Module-J1 (paper drawer 2) and Cassette Feeding Module-K1 (paper
drawer 3 and 4) are optional for imageRUNNER 2016.
• Cassette Feeding Module- K1 (paper drawer 3 and 4) is optional for
imageRUNNER 2020.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-13
Troubleshooting
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during
8
Open the paper drawer’s left cover.
2
Remove any jammed paper.
3
Pull out the paper drawer and remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
1
8
8-14
Clearing Paper Jams
4
Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it
clicks.
CAUTION
5
Troubleshooting
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to
get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Close the paper drawer’s left cover.
8
CAUTION
When closing the paper drawer’s left cover, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-15
Stack Bypass
If a paper jam occurs in the stack bypass, the following screen appears. Follow the
procedure below to remove the jammed paper.
PAPER JAM
OPEN LEFT COVER
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during
Troubleshooting
use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine,
do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or
electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the original or paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
8
1
8-16
Remove all paper from the stack bypass.
Clearing Paper Jams
2
Remove any jammed paper.
If you cannot remove the jammed paper, follow the procedure described in
"Fixing Unit," on p. 8-6.
Duplex Unit-A1 (Optional)
Troubleshooting
If a paper jam occurs inside the Duplex Unit-A1, the following screen appears.
Follow the procedure described below to remove the jammed paper.
PAPER JAM
OPEN LEFT COVER
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during
use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine,
do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or
electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the original or paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash
them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-17
8
1
Remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting
2
Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open
the left cover.
8
CAUTION
Some parts of the Duplex Unit-A1 are subject to high temperatures. When
removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this unit.
NOTE
When removing the jammed paper from the bottom of the duplex unit, pull the
jammed paper slightly toward the inside. Do not pull the jammed paper right below.
8-18
Clearing Paper Jams
3
Place your hand where the hand symbol is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover
until it clicks into place in the closed position.
CAUTION
4
Follow the instructions on the LCD display.
NOTE
The error indicator indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly lights until
the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information, see "Displays Indicating the
Locations of Paper Jams," on p. 8-3.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-19
Troubleshooting
When closing the left cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
8
Feeder (DADF-P1) (Optional)
If a paper jam occurs in the feeder, the following display appears. Follow the
procedure described below to remove the jammed paper.
CHECK DOCUMENT
FEEDER PAPER JAM
CHECK THE FEEDER
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
Troubleshooting
CAUTION
When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on
the edges of the original or paper.
1
Open the feeder cover.
8
8-20
Clearing Paper Jams
2
Remove any jammed originals.
If you cannot remove the original, proceed to step 3.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the original forcefully, because it may tear.
Open the inner cover, holding it by its front tab.
Troubleshooting
3
8
4
Turn the feed dial and remove any jammed originals.
If you cannot remove the original, proceed to step 5.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-21
5
Close the inner cover.
CAUTION
When closing the inner cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
Troubleshooting
6
Close the feeder cover.
8
CAUTION
When closing the feeder cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught,
as this may result in personal injury.
8-22
Clearing Paper Jams
Open the feeder, and remove any jammed originals.
8
Close the feeder.
Troubleshooting
7
8
CAUTION
When closing the feeder, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this
may result in personal injury.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-23
Finisher-U1 (Optional)
If a paper jam occurs when using the finisher, the following screen appears on the
LCD display. Follow the procedure described below to remove the jammed paper.
FINISHER PAPER JAM
OPEN LEFT COVER
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during
Troubleshooting
use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine,
do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or
electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the original or paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty,
wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the
toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
8
8-24
Clearing Paper Jams
1
If you see the jammed paper, remove it.
2
Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open
the left cover.
Troubleshooting
If you cannot remove it, proceed to step 2.
8
3
Push down the green fixing lever.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-25
CAUTION
Troubleshooting
The parts located around the exit slot guide and the fixing unit are subject
to high temperature. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch
anything in this area except the lever.
4
Holding the green knob, lift the inner guide.
5
Remove any jammed paper under the inner guide.
8
CAUTION
Be careful not to touch inside the machine because some parts get very
hot.
8-26
Clearing Paper Jams
7
Push up the green fixing lever.
Place your hand where the hand symbol is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover
until it clicks into place in the closed position.
Troubleshooting
6
8
CAUTION
When closing the left cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-27
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1 (Optional)
If a paper jam occurs in the Inner 2 Way Tray-E1, the following screen appears.
Follow the procedure described below to remove the jammed paper.
PAPER JAM
OPEN LEFT COVER
WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine, do
not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside the
machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during
Troubleshooting
use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside the machine,
do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or
electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the original or paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care
not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty,
wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the
toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove
the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and
getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
8
8-28
Clearing Paper Jams
1
If you see the jammed paper, remove it.
2
Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open
the left cover.
Troubleshooting
If you cannot remove it, proceed to step 2.
8
3
Push down the green fixing lever.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-29
CAUTION
Troubleshooting
The parts located around the exit slot guide and the fixing unit are subject
to high temperature. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch
anything in this area except the lever.
4
Holding the green knob, lift the inner guide.
5
Remove any jammed paper.
8
CAUTION
Be careful not to touch inside the machine because some parts get very
hot.
8-30
Clearing Paper Jams
7
Push up the green fixing lever.
Place your hand where the hand symbol is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover
until it clicks into place in the closed position.
Troubleshooting
6
8
CAUTION
When closing the left cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as
this may result in personal injury.
Clearing Paper Jams
8-31
Clearing Staple Jams
If a staple jam occurs, follow the procedure described below to remove the jammed
staples.
Finisher-U1 (Optional)
Troubleshooting
If the machine does not staple even though you have set the staple mode, staple
jams may have occurred in the optional Finisher-U1. Follow the procedure
described below to remove jammed staples.
1
Open the front cover of the finisher.
2
Pull out the staple case, holding the tab as illustrated below.
8
8-32
Clearing Staple Jams
Push down the tab of the staple case.
4
Remove all of the staples that slide from the staple case.
Troubleshooting
3
8
5
Return the tab of the staple case to its original position.
Clearing Staple Jams
8-33
Push the staple case back firmly into the finisher.
7
Close the front cover of the finisher.
Troubleshooting
6
8
CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
8-34
Clearing Staple Jams
List of Error Messages
Self-Diagnostic Display
The machine is equipped with a self-diagnostic function.
Self-diagnostic (error) messages appear on the LCD display when:
• printing
• you
cannot be performed because of an operational error.
need to make a decision or take some action during scanning or printing.
Cause
It is possible that the paper size detected automatically by the paper drawer
does not match the actual paper size. Another possibility is that the paper size
selected for the stack bypass in the <SELECT PAPER SIZE> menu does not
match the paper size actually set on the stack bypass.
Remedy
Make sure the actual paper size matches the selected paper size. Set the
correct paper size.
CHECK DOCUMENT
Cause
A paper jam may have occurred in the feeder.
Remedy
Remove the jammed document.
8
CLEANING/PLEASE WAIT
Cause
This message is displayed during cleaning.
Remedy
Wait until the cleaning is complete.
CLOSE COVER/FEEDER COVER
Cause
The feeder cover is open.
Remedy
Close the feeder cover.
Troubleshooting
CHANGE PAPERSIZE
List of Error Messages
8-35
CLOSE COVER/FINISHER COVER
Cause
The front cover of the finisher is open.
Remedy
Close the front cover of the finisher.
CLOSE COVER/FRONT OR LEFT COVER
Cause
One or more cover is open.
Remedy
Close all the covers.
CLOSE COVER/PLATEN COVER
Cause
The platen cover is open.
Remedy
Close the platen cover.
Troubleshooting
CLOSE DRAWER COVER
Cause
The left cover of the optional paper drawer is open.
Remedy
Close the paper drawer’s left cover.
DATA ERROR
8
Cause
The machine may have trouble.
Remedy
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
DOCUMENT TOO LONG
Cause
You have tried to copy an original that is too long for using the feeder.
Remedy
Scan it on the platen glass.
DRUM IS NOT SET/INSERT THE DRUM
Cause
Drum unit has not been installed.
Remedy
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
FEEDER PAPER JAM/CHECK THE FEEDER
8-36
Cause
Document jam has occurred in the feeder.
Remedy
Open the feeder cover and check for jammed document.
List of Error Messages
FINISHER PAPER JAM/OPEN LEFT COVER
Cause
Paper jam has occurred in the finisher.
Remedy
Open the left cover and check for jammed paper.
INITIALIZING...
Cause
This message is displayed when the main power is turned ON.
Remedy
Wait until the message disappears.
LOAD PAPER
Cause
The paper drawer is out of paper, or not inserted correctly.
Remedy
Insert the paper drawer as far as it will go or load paper.
Cause
The machine’s memory is full of scanned documents.
Remedy
Divide the original into some stacks and scan them one by one.
Troubleshooting
MEMORY FULL
NO APPROPRIATE SIZE
Cause
Although <AUTO> is selected when copying, paper of suitable size is not set in
the paper drawer nor on the stack bypass.
Remedy
Select the paper size, or set the copy ratio.
If you press
(Start) while this message is displayed, the paper with the least
margin is selected automatically and printing starts.
NO CONTROL CARD/INSERT CONTROL CARD
Cause
The control card is not inserted into the card reader.
Remedy
Insert the control card into the card reader.
NO DOCUMENT/CHECK FEEDER
Cause
No document is loaded in the feeder.
Remedy
Load a document in the feeder.
List of Error Messages
8-37
8
OUT OF STAPLES/REPLACE STAPLE CART.
Cause
There are only few staples remaining in the staple cartridge.
Remedy
Replace the staple cartridge.
OUT OF TONER/CHANGE TONER
Cause
The toner cartridge has run out of toner.
Remedy
Replace the toner cartridge.
OUTPUT TRAY FULL
Cause
The output tray is full of paper.
Remedy
Remove the prints from the output trays.
Troubleshooting
OVER PAGE LIMIT/PRESS OK KEY
Cause
The machine is set to restrict the printing.
Remedy
Enter the Department ID Management menu in the System Settings menu,
open the <PAGE LIMIT SET.> menu and change the maximum number of
pages that can be printed.
PAPER JAM/OPEN LEFT COVER
8
Cause
An original jam or paper jam has occurred, preventing you from making prints.
Remedy
Remove paper from the machine following the guidance. If you open a cover
during printing, this message also appears. In such a case, open the cover
again and check if there is any jammed paper. If you find any, remove it, and
close the cover. Then the message disappears.
PAPER JAM/OPEN LEFT/DRWR COVER
Cause
Paper jam has occurred in the optional paper drawer.
Remedy
Open the paper drawer’s left cover and check for jammed paper.
REMOVE DOC. ON GLASS
8-38
Cause
The original remains on the platen glass.
Remedy
Remove the original from the platen glass, and operate the machine again.
List of Error Messages
STAPLE JAM/OPEN FINISHER COVER
Cause
A staple jam may have occurred in the Finisher-U1.
Remedy
Check if a staple jam has occurred.
STOP KEY PRESSED/PRESS OK KEY
Cause
Remedy
(Stop) has been pressed while scanning the original using the feeder.
Press [OK], and set the original again.
Cause
An error of some kind has occurred in the machine.
Remedy
Turn OFF the main power, wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it ON again.
If this does not solve the problem, unplug the machine and contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
* xxx stands for a number.
TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER
Cause
Toner is running out.
Remedy
Rock the toner cartridge to redistribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. If
the message persists, install a new cartridge.
TOO MANY OUTPUTS/CANNOT STAPLE
Cause
The machine cannot staple the printouts because too many sheets of paper
have been printed out.
Remedy
The printouts are simply collated without stapling. If necessary, reduce the
number of pages in the document and print again.
WASTE TONER FULL
Cause
The drum unit is filled with waste toner.
Remedy
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
List of Error Messages
8-39
Troubleshooting
SYSTEM ERROR/Exxx*
8
Service Call Message
Troubleshooting
If the machine malfunctions, service call messages appear on the LCD display.
• E000
• E100
• E500
• E719
• E001
• E196
• E520
• E730
• E002
• E197
• E531
• E736
• E003
• E246
• E540
• E733
• E007
• E247
• E542
• E739
• E010
• E350
• E575
• E805
• E019
• E354
• E584
• E808
• E052
• E355
• E716
Contacting Your Local Authorized Canon Dealer
If a malfunction occurs and the machine cannot operate normally, service call
messages appear on the LCD display. Follow the procedure described below to
solve the problem.
8
WARNING
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result
in electrical shock.
CAUTION
Always grasp the power plug portion when disconnecting the power cord.
Pulling on the cord portion may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise
damage the power cord. If the power cord is damaged, this could cause an
electricity leak and result in a fire or electrical shock.
IMPORTANT
If you turn OFF the main power when there is any stored job, its data will be deleted.
8-40
Service Call Message
2
Turn the main power switch OFF. Allow at least ten seconds
before turning the main power switch back ON.
If the machine still does not operate normally, follow the
procedure below, and contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
Troubleshooting
1
❑ Turn OFF the main power.
8
❑ Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.
NOTE
When contacting your local authorized Canon dealer, check the following:
- Model name
- Problem and status of the machine
- Error code on the LCD display
Service Call Message
8-41
Appendix
9
CHAPTER
This chapter provides the specifications of the main unit and the optional equipment, and other
useful information.
Report Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
User’s Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Department ID List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
One-Touch Speed Dialing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
One-Touch Speed Dialing List (Detailed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Coded Speed Dialing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Coded Speed Dialing List (Detailed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Group Dial List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Feeder (DADF-P1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Cassette Feeding Module-J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Cassette Feeding Module-K1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Finisher-U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Duplex Unit-A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Card Reader-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart . . . . . . 9-11
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9-1
Report Samples
User’s Data List
Appendix
Department ID List
9
9-2
Report Samples
Activity Report
Appendix
One-Touch Speed Dialing List
One-Touch Speed Dialing List (Detailed)
9
Report Samples
9-3
Coded Speed Dialing List
Appendix
Coded Speed Dialing List (Detailed)
Group Dial List
9
9-4
Report Samples
Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or
future release.
Main Unit
Item
Specification
Canon imageRUNNER 2020/2016
Type
Desktop
Platen type
Stationary
Photoconductive material
OPC
Copying system
Indirect electrostatic copying
Developing system
Single component dry toner projection development
Fixing system
On-demand Fusing
Resolution
Reading
Printing
Number of tones
256
Acceptable paper stock
Paper drawer: 17 lb to 24 lb bond (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
Plain, Color, Recycled, Heavy (up to 24 lb
bond [90 g/m2]), Bond, 3-HOLE punch
Stack bypass: 17 lb to 32 lb bond (64 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)
Plain, Color, Recycled, Heavy, Bond,
3-HOLE punch, Transparency, Labels,
Envelopes
Acceptable originals
Sheet, Books, 3-dimensional objects (Up to approx. 4.4 lb
[2 kg])
Maximum original size
11 3/4" × 17" (297 mm × 432 mm)
Paper sizes
Paper drawer: 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT
Stack bypass: 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR,
EXEC, A4, A4R, A3, B4, B5R, B5, A5R, A5,
Free size (3 3/4" × 5 7/8" to 11 3/4" × 17"
[95 mm × 148 mm to 297 mm × 432 mm]),
Envelopes (ISO-B5, ISO-C5, COM10, DL,
Monarch)
Appendix
Name
600 dpi × 600 dpi
1200 dpi × 1200 dpi
Specifications
9
9-5
Item
Specification
Non-image areas
Leading edge:
Left side:
1/8" × 1/16" (3.0 mm ± 2.0 mm)
1/8" × 1/16" (3.0 mm ± 2.0 mm)
Warm-up time
When main power is turned ON: approx. 13 seconds
*Activation time may vary depending on the conditions under
which the machine is used. (In all cases, at a room
temperature of 68 °F [20 °C].)
First copy time
Platen glass selected: 7.9 seconds
(LTR, direct, paper drawer 1)
Copy speed
imageRUNNER 2020/2016 (sheets per minutes)
2020
Direct
11" × 17"
10
LGL
10
LTR
20
LTRR
11
STMT
15
11
Reduction
LGL → LTRR (78 %)
11" × 17" → LGL (73 %)
10
11
11" × 17" → LTRR (64 %)
13
11" × 17" → STMTR (50 %)
Enlargement LGL → 11" × 17" (121 %)
10
10
LTRR → 11" × 17" (129 %)
10
STMTR → 11" × 17" (200 %)
2016
10
10
16
11
15
11
10
11
13
10
10
10
Appendix
Direct
Reduction
Magnification
1:1 (±0.5 %)
1:0.78 (LGL → LTRR)
1:0.73 (11" × 17" → LGL)
1:0.64 (11" × 17" → LTRR)
1:0.50 (11" × 17" → STMTR)
Enlargement 1:1.21 (LGL → 11" × 17")
1:1.29 (LTRR → 11" × 17")
1:2.000 (STMTR → 11" × 17")
Paper feeding system
Paper drawer: 250 sheets × 2 drawers (20 lb bond [80 g/m2])
250 sheets × 1 drawer (20 lb bond [80 g/m2])
Stack bypass: 80 sheets (LTR/STMT/STMTR/EXEC/A4/B5/
A5/A5R, 20 lb bond [80 g/m2])
50 sheets (LTRR/LGL/11" × 17"/A4R/A3/B4/
B5R, 20 lb bond [80 g/m2])
50 sheets (Transparencies/Heavyweight
paper, 24 lb to 32 lb bond [91 to 128 g/m2])
10 envelopes
1 sheet (Labels)
Density control
Automatic or manual (9 levels)
Multiple copies
1 to 99 sheets
Power source
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 4.6 A
9
9-6
Specifications
Item
Specification
Max power consumption
1.55 kW max.
Dimensions (W × D × H)
24 1/2" × 25" × 26 1/4" [622 mm × 633.4 mm × 665.4 mm]
(imageRUNNER 2020)
24 1/2" × 25" × 22 7/8" [622 mm × 633.4 mm × 580.4 mm]
(imageRUNNER 2016)
Installation space (W × D)
40 1/8" × 49 1/4" (1018 mm × 1249 mm)
(Left cover is opened and paper drawer is pulled out)
Weight
Approx. 101 lb (46 kg) (imageRUNNER 2020)
Approx. 87 lb (39.6 kg) (imageRUNNER 2016)
Feeder (DADF-P1)
Item
Specification
Automatic Document Feeder
Originals
Original supply tray: 11" × 17"/LGL/LTR/LTRR/STMT
Original paper weights
14 lb to 28 lb bond [52 g/m2 to 105 g/m2] (One-page
scanning for 10 lb to 14 lb bond [37 g/m2 to 52 g/m2] and
28 lb to 32 lb bond [105 g/m2 to 128 g/m2])
Original tray capacity
LTR/LTRR: 50 sheets (20 lb bond [80 g/m2])
LGL/11" × 17": 25 sheets (20 lb bond [80 g/m2])
Original replacement
speed
20 sheets/minute (LTR)
Power source
From main unit
Power consumption
Approx. 26 W max.
Dimensions (W × D × H)
22 1/4" × 19 1/4" × 4 7/8" (565 mm × 489.4 mm × 122 mm)
Weight
Approx. 16 lb (7.0 kg)
Appendix
Type
9
Specifications
9-7
Cassette Feeding Module-J1
Item
Specification
Paper sizes
11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT
Paper capacity
250 sheets × 1 drawer (20 lb bond [80 g/m2])
Power source
From main unit
Power consumption
Approx. 3 W max.
Dimensions (W × D × H)
22 7/8" × 22 3/8" × 4 5/8" (580.3 mm × 569.3 mm × 116.8 mm)
Weight
Approx. 13 lb (6.0 kg)
Cassette Feeding Module-K1
Appendix
Item
Paper sizes
11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT
Paper capacity
250 sheets × 2 drawer (20 lb bond [80 g/m2])
Power source
From main unit
Power consumption
Approx. 13 W max.
Dimensions (W × D × H)
22 7/8" × 22 3/8" × 8" (580.3 mm × 569.3 mm × 201.8 mm)
Weight
Approx. 26 lb (12.0 kg)
9
9-8
Specification
Specifications
Finisher-U1
Item
Specification
17 lb to 32 lb bond (64 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)
Capacity per tray
Standard type
Non-collate
LTR/STMT/STMTR: 770 sheets or 4" (100 mm)
LTRR/LGL/11" × 17": 380 sheets or 2" (50 mm)
Collate mode
LTR: 770 sheets or 4" (100 mm)
LTRR/LGL/11" × 17": 380 sheets or 2" (50 mm)
Staple mode
LTR: 30 sets or 4" (100 mm)
LTRR/LGL/11" × 17": 30 sets or 2" (50 mm)
Additional Finisher Tray-C1 is attached
Non-collate
LTR/STMT/STMTR: 200 sheets or 1" (26 mm)
LTRR/LGL/11" × 17": 150 sheets or 3/4" (20 mm)
Collate mode
LTR: 200 sheets or 1" (26 mm)
LTRR/LGL/11" × 17": 150 sheets or 3/4" (20 mm)
Staple mode
LTR: 30 sets or 1" (26 mm)
LTRR/LGL/11" × 17": 30 sets or 3/4" (20 mm)
Max. stapling capacity
LTRR/11" × 17"/LGL: 30 sheets
LTR: 50 sheets
Available staple size
LTR/LTRR/LGL/11" × 17"
Available offset size
LTR/LTRR/LGL/11" × 17"
Power source
From main unit
Power consumption
Approx. 46 W max.
Dimensions (W × D × H)
18 1/8" × 20 1/2" × 11 7/8" (480 mm × 520 mm × 300 mm)
Installation space (W × D)
47 1/8" × 49 1/8" (1198 mm × 1249 mm)
(When the left cover of the main unit is opened and the
auxiliary tray of the Additional Finisher Tray-C1 is extended)
Weight
Approx. 22 lb (10 kg)
Appendix
Paper
9
Specifications
9-9
Duplex Unit-A1
Item
Specification
Paper sizes
11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT
Paper weight
17 lb to 24 lb bond (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
Power source
From main unit
Power consumption
Approx. 15 W max.
Dimensions (W × D × H)
17 1/4" × 17 5/8" × 14 7/8" (437.2 mm × 448 mm × 378.3 mm)
Weight
Approx. 5 lb (2.5 kg)
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1
Appendix
Item
Specification
Capacity (Tray A only)
LTR: 100 sheets (20 lb bond [80 g/m2])
LGL/LTRR/STMT/STMTR/11" × 17": 50 sheets (20 lb bond
[80 g/m2])
Power source
From main unit
Power consumption
Approx. 5 W max.
Dimensions (W × D × H)
19 1/8" × 17 3/4" × 6" (485.5 mm × 451 mm × 151.2 mm)
Installation space (W × D)
Incorporated in the main unit
Weight
Approx. 3 lb (1.5 kg)
9
Card Reader-E1
Item
Specification
Card to be used
Magnetic type card, Optical type card
Card readout method
Magnetic/Optical readout
Magnetic card reading
direction
Inserting Direction
Store/replay
Replay
Power source
From main unit
Dimensions (W × D × H)
3 1/2" × 4" × 1 1/4" (88 mm × 100 mm × 32 mm)
Weight
Approx. 5/8 lb (295 g)
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
9-10
Specifications
Relationship between Original Orientation and
Preprinted Paper Output Chart
Please use this chart when printing on preprinted paper (i.e., paper with logos).
NOTE
If you want to copy on the back side of preprinted paper, place the side you want to copy
on:
- face up when using a paper drawer
- face down when using the stack bypass
■ If You Want to Set Stapling:
Corner: Top Left
LTR
Confidential
11" × 17", LGL
LTRR
Orientation in
paper drawer
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Preprinted side:
Face up
Orientation in stack
bypass
laitnedifnoC
Preprinted Paper
Corner: Top Left
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Original/
Paper
Orientation,
Settings
Output
Example
Corner: Top Left
Appendix
Staple
Position
Confidential
Preprinted side:
Face down
Confidential
Confidential
9
Orientation on
the platen glass
Original
Original side:
Face down
Orientation in
the feeder
Original side:
Face up
Auto Orientation Setting
Either On or Off
Either On or Off (Set to ‘On’
when paper orientation in the
stack bypass/paper drawer
is vertical.)
Either On or Off
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
9-11
■ If You Do Not Want to Set the Staple Mode:
Output
Example
Corner: Top Left
Corner: Top Left
LTR
11" × 17", LGL
Confidential
LTRR
Orientation in
paper drawer
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Preprinted side:
Face up
Orientation in stack
bypass
laitnedifnoC
Preprinted Paper
Confidential
Confidential
Confidential
Original/
Paper
Orientation,
Settings
Corner: Top Left
Confidential
Preprinted side:
Face down
Confidential
Confidential
Orientation on
the platen glass
Original
Original side:
Face down
Orientation in
the feeder
Original side:
Face up
Appendix
Auto Orientation Setting
Either On or Off
Either On or Off (Set to ‘On’
when paper orientation in the
stack bypass/paper drawer
is vertical.)
9
9-12
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
Either On or Off
Index
A
B
Activity Report, 5-47
Additional Finisher Tray-C1, 4-3, 4-11
Additional Functions
Address Book Set., 5-9
Adjustment/Cleaning, 5-12
Common Settings, 5-3
Copy Settings, 5-7
Fax Settings, 5-8
Printer Settings, 5-10
Report Settings, 5-13
System Settings, 5-13
Timer Settings, 5-12
Additional Functions Key, 1-15
Address Book Set., 5-9
Adjusting/Cleaning the Machine
Adjusting the Machine, 7-35
Adjustment/Cleaning, 5-12
Automatic Feeder Cleaning, 7-30
Feeder Smudge Adjustment, 7-41
Manual Feeder Cleaning, 7-26
Prevent Paper Curls or Jams, 7-36
Prevent Paper Jams in the Two-Sided Mode,
7-37
Print Quality and Density Improvement, 7-35
Setting the Fixing Unit Offset, 7-40
Setting the Special Bond Fixing Mode, 7-39
Using Lightweight Paper, 7-38
Audible Tones, 5-19
Auto Clear, 2-7, 5-17
Auto Clear Time, 5-42
Auto Drawer Switching, 2-7, 5-23
Auto Paper Selection, 5-23
Auto Sleep, 5-41
Auxiliary Tray, 4-11
Available Combination of Options, 4-6
Bond Paper, 2-24
C
Canceling a Job, 3-5
Card Reader-E1
About the Card Reader-E1, 4-3, 4-16
Department ID Management, 4-19
Specifications, 9-10
Cassette Feeding Module
About the Cassette Feeding Module-J1, 4-3
About the Cassette Feeding Module-K1, 4-3
Paper Drawer 1, 8-9
Paper Drawers 2, 3, and 4, 8-13
Specifications, 9-8
Checking Counter Information, 6-17
Checking Job Status, 3-3
Checking the Counter, 3-2
Checking the TX/RX Log, 6-30
Cleaning
Automatic Feeder Cleaning, 7-30
Drum Cleaning, 7-32
Fuser Roller Cleaning, 7-33
Manual Feeder Cleaning, 7-26
Routine Cleaning, 7-24
Transcription Roller Cleaning, 7-31
Clearing Page Totals, 6-21
Collate
Finisher-U1, 4-12
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1, 4-15
Color Paper, 2-24
Common Settings
Adjusting the Print Density, 5-22
Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching,
5-23
Index
9-13
9
9
Changing the Language Shown on the LCD
Display, 5-35
Default Display after Auto Clear, 5-17
Displaying a Feeder Error Message Prompt,
5-36
Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode, 5-26
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source,
5-25
Initial Function at Power ON, 5-15
Output Tray Designation, 5-28
Returning the Common Settings to Their
Defaults, 5-37
Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority, 5-33
Setting the Toner Saver Mode, 5-21
Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass, 5-30
Tone Settings, 5-19
Consumables
Paper Stock, 7-42
Stamp Cartridge, 7-44
Staple Cartridge, 7-44
Toner Cartridge, 7-43
Control Panel
About the Control Panel, 1-12
Control Panel Power Switch, 1-14
Facsimile Control Panel, 1-16
Main Control Panel, 1-14
Control Panel Power Switch, 1-24
Copy Settings, 5-7
Copying, definition, xiii
Current Date and Time, 5-38
D
Date Format, 5-40
Daylight Saving Time, 5-44
Default Settings, 5-37
Department ID and Password
Entering the Department ID and Password,
2-11
Department ID Management, 6-7
Accepting Print Jobs with Unknown IDs, 6-22
Checking Counter Information, 6-17
Clearing Page Totals, 6-21
Erasing the Department ID and Password, 6-15
Printing Counter Information, 6-20
9-14
Index
Registering the Department ID, Password, and
Page Limit, 6-9
Specifying Department ID Management, 6-8
Device Information, 6-34
Different Paper Size, 7-7
Display Language, 5-35
Document Tray-J1, 4-3
Duplex Unit-A1
About the Duplex Unit-A1, 4-3, 8-17
Specifications, 9-10
E
Energy Consumption, 5-26
Entering Characters, 2-8
Envelope, 2-14, 2-24
Erasing the Department ID and Password, 6-15
Error Messages, 8-35
External View, 1-11
F
Facsimile Control Panel, 1-16
Fax Panel-A1, 4-3
Fax Settings, 5-8
Feeder (DADF-P1)
About the Feeder (DADF-P1), 4-3, 4-8
Clearing Paper Jams, 8-20
Feeder Cover, 4-9
Original Output Area, 4-9
Original Supply Tray, 4-9
Slide Guides, 4-9
Specifications, 9-7
Feeder Cover, 4-9
Finisher-U1
About the Finisher-U1, 4-3, 4-11
Additional Finisher Tray-C1, 4-11
Auxiliary Tray, 4-11
Clearing Paper Jams, 8-24
Clearing Staple Jams, 8-32
Finishing Modes, 4-12
Front Cover, 4-11
Output Tray, 4-11
Replacing the Staple Cartridge, 7-20
Specifications, 9-9
Finishing Modes, 4-12
Fixing Unit, 1-13, 8-6
Free Size, 2-14
Front Cover
Finisher-U1, 4-11
Main Unit, 1-13
G
K
Keys Used in This Manual, x
L
Labels, 2-24
Left Cover, 1-13
Loading Paper, 7-2
Paper Drawers, 7-2
Stack Bypass, 2-13
Group
Finisher-U1, 4-12
M
H
Handling Precautions, 1-8
Heavy Paper, 2-24
Main Control Panel, 1-14
Main Power, 1-20
Main Power Switch, 1-12
Managing User IDs, 6-24
Moving the Machine, 1-7
Multifunctional Operations, 2-22
I
ID Key, 1-15
Illustrations Used in This Manual, xi
Initial Function, 5-15
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1
About the Inner 2 Way Tray-E1, 4-3, 4-15
Clearing Paper Jams, 8-28
Specifications, 9-10
Tray A, 4-15, 5-28
Tray B, 4-15, 5-28
Installation
Installation Space, 1-6
Location and Handling, 1-2
Power Supply, 1-5
Precautions, 1-2
Safety Instructions, xviii
Internal View, 1-13
J
N
Numeric Keys, 1-14
9
O
Offset
Finisher-U1, 4-12
Optional Equipment, 4-2
Card Reader-E1, 4-16
Cassette Feeding Module-J1/K1, 4-31
Feeder (DADF-P1), 4-8
Finisher-U1, 4-11
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1, 4-15
Platen Cover Type J, 4-10
Original Orientation, 9-11
Original Output Area, 4-9
Original Supply Tray, 4-9
Jam Location Indicator, 8-4
Index
9-15
9
P
R
Paper Drawer’s Left Cover, 1-13
Paper Drawers
About the Paper Drawers, 1-12
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different
Paper Size, 7-7
Clearing Paper Jams, 8-9, 8-13
Loading Paper, 7-2
Paper Jams
Displays Indicating the Locations of Paper
Jams, 8-3
Duplex Unit-A1, 8-17
Feeder (DADF-P1), 8-20
Finisher-U1, 8-24
Fixing Unit, 8-6
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1, 8-28
Paper Drawer 1, 8-9
Paper Drawers 2, 3, and 4, 8-13
Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams, 8-2
Stack Bypass, 8-16
Paper Stock
Available Paper Stock, 2-24
Paper Size, 2-25
Paper Type, 2-24
Parts and Functions of the Main Unit
External View, 1-11
Facsimile Control Panel, 1-16
Internal View, 1-13
Main Control Panel, 1-14
Password, 2-11
Plain Paper, 2-24
Platen Cover Type J
About the Platen Cover Type J, 1-12, 4-3, 4-10
Platen Cover, 4-10
Platen Glass, 1-13
Print Density, 5-22
Printer Settings, 5-10
Printing Counter Information, 6-20
Printing, definition, xiii
Procedure after Using the Machine, 4-18
Procedure before Using the Machine, 4-17
Recycled Paper, 2-24
Remote UI, 6-26
Report Settings, 5-13
Reset Key, 1-14
Restricting Access to Destinations, 6-28
Restricting the USB Interface Port, 6-32
Roller Cleaning, 7-24
Routine Cleaning, 7-24
9-16
Index
S
Safety Instructions
Consumables, xxvi
Handling, xxi
Installation, xviii
Maintenance and Inspection, xxiv
Other Warnings, xxvi
Power Supply, xx
Scanning, definition, xii
Service Call Message, 8-40
Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority, 5-33
Sleep Mode, 1-24, 5-26
Slide Guides, 4-9
Specifications
Card Reader-E1, 9-10
Cassette Feeding Module-J1, 9-8
Cassette Feeding Module-K1, 9-8
Duplex Unit-A1, 9-10
Feeder (DADF-P1), 9-7
Finisher-U1, 9-9
Inner 2 Way Tray-E1, 9-10
Main Unit, 9-5
Speed Dialing Lists, 5-48
Stack Bypass
About the Stack Bypass, 1-12, 2-13
Auxiliary Tray, 2-15
Clearing Paper Jams, 8-16
Printing, 2-13
Slide Guides, 2-15
Tray Extension, 2-15
Stamp Cartridge, 7-12
Standard Size, 2-14
Staple
Finisher-U1, 4-13
Start Key, 1-14
Stop Key, 1-14
Symbols Used in This Manual, x
System Configuration, 4-2
System Manager ID, 6-2
System Manager’s Name, 6-5
System Monitor, 3-3, 3-6
System Options, 4-5
System Password, 6-4
System Settings
Checking the TX/RX Log, 6-30
Device Information Settings, 6-34
Managing User IDs, 6-24
Remote UI, 6-26
Restricting Access to Destinations, 6-28
Restricting the USB Interface Port, 6-32
System Manager ID, 6-2
System Manager Settings, 6-2
System Manager’s Name, 6-5
System Password, 6-4
U
Unknown ID, 6-22
User ID Management, 6-24
User’s Data List, 5-51
T
Three Hole Punch Paper, 2-24
Timer Settings
Auto Clear Time, 5-42
Auto Sleep Time, 5-41
Current Date and Time, 5-38
Daylight Saving Time, 5-44
Setting the Date Format, 5-40
Toner Cartridge, 1-13, 7-15
Toner Consumption, 5-21
Transparency, 2-24
Tray A, 4-15
Tray B, 4-15
Troubleshooting
Clearing Paper Jams, 8-3
Clearing Staple Jams, 8-32
Error Messages, 8-35
Service Call Message, 8-40
9
Index
9-17
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.
17, quai du Président Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON (U.K.) LTD.
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey, RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano, 8 20097 San Donato Milanese (MI) Italy
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way Suite 400, Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON CHINA CO., LTD.
15F, North Tower, Beijing Kerry Centre, 1 Guang Hua Road, Chao Yang District, 100020, Beijing, China
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
FA7-7437 (000)
XXXXXXXX
© CANON INC. 2005
120V
PRINTED IN JAPAN
OR CHINA